Energy Saving by SMC Pneumatic
Energy Saving by SMC Pneumatic
Energy Saving by SMC Pneumatic
E02-21 B
Actuators
Non-rotating double power cylinder Series MGZ Actuator Page 2
Guide table Series MGF Actuator 19
PFC/QFC valves PFC/QFC valves Actuator 21
Air saving valves Series ASR/ASQ Actuator 23
Hollow rod cylinders (Made to Order) Air blow 34
Free mount cylinder for vacuum Series ZCUK Air blow 35
Water resistant air cylinders Air leakage 36
Cylinder with heavy duty scraper (Made to Order) Air leakage 40
Actuators
Cylinder with coil scraper (Made to Order) Air leakage 41
Air-hydro booster (Made to Order) Hydraulic clamp 42
Air-hydro converter Series CCT Hydraulic clamp 45
Directional Control Equipment
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VXD21/22/23 Air blow, Air tool, Non-operation Page 48
Direct operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VCA Air blow, Air tool 51
Directional Control
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VQ20/30 Air blow, Air tool 53
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VXZ Cooling water 55
Equipment
Direct air operated 2 port valve Series VXA21/22 Air purge 57
Pilot operated 3 port solenoid valve Series VP300/500/700 Air purge, Paint stirring 58
Pilot operated 3 port solenoid valve Series VG342 Air purge, Non-operation 60
Large 3 port solenoid valve Series VP3145/3165/3185 Air purge, Non-operation 62
3 port mechanical valve Series VM1000 VM100/200/400 Air purge 64
Coolant valve Series VNC Coolant 68
Flow switching 2 port air operated valve (Special order product) Paint stirring 70
Booster valve Series VBA1110 to 4200 Hydraulic clamp 71
Equipment
Blow gun Series VMG Air blow Page 74
Nozzles for blowing/Sensing heads Series KN Air blow, Air tool, Coolant 80
S couplers Series KK Air blow, Air tool, Air leakage 83
FR double layer tubing Series TRB Air leakage 104
FR double layer polyurethane tubing Series TRBU Air leakage 105
Double layer tubing stripper Series TKS Air leakage 106
Polyurethane coil tubing Series TCU Air blow, Air tool 107
Tube cutter Series TK Air leakage 107
Measuring Instruments
Modular type regulator Series AR10 to 60 Air blow, Air tool 108
Pilot operated regulator Series AR425 to 935 Air blow, Air tool 109
Regulator with back flow mechanism Series AR20K to 60K 110
Sensors
Actuator
Filter regulator Series AW10 to 40 Air blow, Air tool 111
Filter regulator with back flow mechanism Series AW20K to 40K Actuator 113
Air filter element part number list Air line maintenance 114
Differential pressure gauge GD40-2-01 Air line maintenance 115
Filter with element service indicator Air line maintenance 116
Sensors/Measuring Instruments
Vacuum Equipment
Digital flow switch Series PF2A/PF2W Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool, Air leakage, Cooling water Page 118
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch Series ZSE30/ISE30 Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool, Vacuum 154
High precision digital pressure switch Series ZSE40/ISE40 Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air tool, Vacuum 162
Digital pressure switch Series ZSE3/ISE3 Air line maintenance 171
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50 Air line maintenance, Liquid removal, Coolant 173
2-color display digital pressure switch Series ISE70/75/75H Air line maintenance, Liquid removal, Coolant 182
Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE5B/ISE5B Air line maintenance, Liquid removal, Coolant 189
Compact manometer Series PPA Air blow, Air tool 197
Air leakage tester (Made to Order) Air line maintenance, Air blow, Air leakage 203
Air catch sensor Series ISA2 Air purge 205
Air catch sensor Series ISA
Industrial Filters
Vacuum Equipment
Vacuum ejector Series ZH Liquid removal Page 226
In-line vacuum ejector Series ZU Liquid removal 228
Multistage ejector Series ZL112/ 212 Vacuum 229
Vacuum ejector with check valve (Special order product) Vacuum 234
Pad with check valve (Special order product) Vacuum 235
Vacuum ejector for water soluble coolant removal (Special order product) Liquid removal 236
Industrial Filters
(CD-ROM)
Other (CD-ROM)
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00 Actuator Page 252
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2 Air blow, Air tool, Coolant 257
SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6 Actuator 259
Table of Contents 2
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM1
RESET
SET
UNIT
SMC FLOW SWITCH
RESET
SET
UNIT
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch Series ZSE30/ISE30 154
High precision digital pressure switch Series ISE40 162
SMC FLOW SWITCH
RESET
UNIT
LED display digital pressure switch Series ISE3 171
173
SET
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50
2-color display digital pressure switch Series ISE70/75/75H 182
Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ISE5B 189
Low maintenance filter Series FN1 240
Air filter element part number list 114
Paint tank
Front matter 1
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM2
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch Series ZSE30/ISE30 Page 154
Vacuum
Proposal 9 Air reduction for vacuum ejectors
High precision digital pressure switch Series ZSE40 162
Vacuum ejector with check valve (Special order product) 234
Suction transfer Pad with check valve (Special order product) 235
Multistage ejector Series ZL112, 212 229
Vacuum ejector for water soluble coolant removal (Special order product) Page 236
Liquid Removal
Proposal 10 Air reduction for
Vacuum ejector Series ZH 226
Linear vacuum ejector Series ZU 228
P Negative pressure detection valve (Special order product) 224
liquid removal pumps Air type liquid High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50 173
removal pump Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE5B/ISE5B 189
Machine
Oil pan
Oil waste
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VXZ Page 55
Cooling Water
Proposal 12 Power reduction for
Digital flow switch for water Series PF2W 118
Front matter 2
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM3
Recognizing the current state... First step toward energy savings and improving awareness
To promote energy savings in pneumatic
systems, it is necessary to recognize and
control the existing system's air consump-
tion and to improve the awareness of en- Actuators
10%
ergy saving (cost awareness) in the work Air 20%
place.
Air leakage
Based on usage, electric power consumption for Other 20%
50% Air blow
air (compressor) is thought to be 20% of the entire Coolant
30% 70%
consumption (Figure 1).
Furthermore, air consumption based on usage is
as shown in Figure 2. It is necessary to under-
stand and control the air consumption for these
(Figure 1) (Figure 2)
usages.
Electric power consumption Air consumption
It is said that energy saving measures begin with measurement and end with measurement.
Find out where, how much, and for what purpose the energy is being used.
Then, find out how much can be reduced as a result of improvements.
Effective energy saving improvements can be implemented by recognizing and controlling the current state
of energy consumption and the result of the improvements, entirely with numerical values.
Digital flow switch Air leakage tester Air blow Air leakage
demonstration panel demonstration panel
Series PF2A (Made to Order)
Guides the approach to and Air leakage can be heard and felt.
Separately measures air consumption Measures leakage flow rate. improvement methods for air blow.
by facility and by line. • Measured flow rate: 9999 l (max.) Coolant blow Vacuum ejector
• Measured flow rate: 12000 l (max.) demonstration panel demonstration panel
Compact manometer
Series PPA
Front matter 3
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM4
What are energy saving measures?
Before improvement After improvement
Electric power consumption
A
B
B
C
C
Time Time
Compressors Compressors
Consumption of A: Consumption from equipment operation
Consumption of B: Consumption from line operation
Consumption of C
Front matter 4
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM5
Proposal 1
Air Line Maintenance
Purpose
Flow maintenance
Before Improvement
Since the current flow rate based on the usage is not recognized,
the target for improvement and its effect are not expressed in
numerical values and remain unclear.
After Improvement
Effective use of measuring instruments.
Flow rate is maintained with numerical values, and the target for improvement and its effect are clarified.
Equipment
q w e
Digital flow switch Air leakage tester Compact manometer
for air Equipment
Equipment Equipment
Equipment
q
w
Air leakage tester
Main Points
Measure main line and branch line Measure air leakage rate and air
flow rates. blow rate
Digital flow switch for air Air leakage tester.
Series PF2A Page 118 (Made to Order) Page 203
Measures workpiece
collision pressure to
calculate flow rate by
using flow formula.
Related Equipment
Nozzles for blowing/Sensing heads Series KN P. 80
Front matter 5
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM6
Purpose
Pressure maintenance
Before Improvement
The importance of regular maintenance for the pressure loss caused by
clogged elements is not recognized. Therefore, a large burden is placed on
the compressor and pump, etc.
After Improvement
Regular maintenance of clogged elements is implemented by mounting pressure
and flow monitoring equipment on each type of filter used on each line.
Reciprocating Aftercooler
air compressor (air cooled)
Series HAA Refrigerated air dryer
Series IDF
Aftercooler Air tank
(water cooled) Series AT
Series HAW
Operating line
q Differential
pressure gauge
→ →
IN
Upstream side
OUT
Downsteam side
Main Points
q Check clogged elements by using
w Element service a differential pressure gauge.
indicator
Differential pressure gauge
GD40-2-02 Page 115
e Pressure switch
Series ISE40 Page 162
Related Equipment
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch Series ZSE30/ISE30 P. 154
LED display digital pressure switch Series ISE3 171
High precision digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE50F/ISE50 173
2-color display digital pressure switch Series ISE70/75/75H 182
Digital pressure switch for general purpose fluid Series ISE5B 189
Digital flow switch for water Series PF2W 118
Low maintenance filter Series FN1 240
Industrial filter Series FG 238
Air filter element list 114
Front matter 6
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM7
Proposal 2
Non-operation
Purpose
Reduction of air for purging and air leakage when equipment is non-operation.
Before Improvement
Since the compressor is in continuous operation even when the equipment is non-operation,
air is constantly consumed due to air leakage and purging, etc.
Air purge
M/C Air leakage
After Improvement
Air supply to the equipment is stopped when it is non-operation.
Main Points
Mount a master solenoid valve
to each line and component.
Pilot operated 2 port
solenoid valve
Series VXD21/22/23
Page 48
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement
Reduction
Pilot operated
3 port solenoid valve
Series VP3145/3165/3185
Page 62
Before After
Front matter 7
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM8
Proposal 3
Air Blow
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air blow
Before Improvement
Air blow is performed without any attachment at the air outlet.
S2
S1
ø4
Workpiece
P2 P3
Effective area (mm2) Upstream side S1: 22.6
P1 Nozzle side S2: 45.2
Effective area ratio S1 : S2 = 0.5 : 1
Nozzle size (mm) ø4
Number of nozzles 4
Regulator pressure (P1) 0.4 MPa
Outlet pressure (P2) 0.08 MPa
Collision pressure (P3) ∗ 0.002 MPa
S1 S2 ∗ The pressure that the work piece receives is called collision pressure.
After Improvement
Nozzles are attached
S1
S2
Nozzle
ø1.5 Effective area ratio
Pressure loss: Small
3.5 : 1
ø1.5
Workpiece
P2 P3
Effective area (mm2) Upstream side S1: 22.6
P1 Nozzle side S2: 6.4
Effective area ratio S1 : S2 = 3.5 : 1
Nozzle size (mm) ø1.5
Number of nozzles 4
Regulator pressure (P1) 0.25 MPa
Outlet pressure (P2) 0.225 MPa
Collision pressure (P3)∗ 0.002 MPa
∗ The pressure that the work piece receives is called collision pressure.
S1 S2
75%
Reduction
Before After
Front matter 8
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM9
Before Improvement
In the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered
and the factory line pressure is used directly in most cases.
S1
S2
Effective area ratio Pressure Large
2.3 : 1 loss:
ø3
Without nozzle
ø3
Pressure Loss of Air Gun Only
Upstream side S1: 15
Effective area (mm2) Nozzle side S2: 6.4
Effective area ratio S1 : S2 = 2.3 : 1
Nozzle size (mm) ø3
Number of nozzles 1
Supply pressure 0.700 MPa
Regulator pressure 0.300 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.260 MPa
Pressure loss 0.040 MPa
After Improvement
A nozzle is attached to the tip of the air gun.
A regulator is added and pressure control is improved.
Fittings and tubing are changed to those with large effective areas.
S1
S2
Nozzle ø2
ø2
Reduction
Before After
Front matter 9
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM10
Main Points
Pressure loss improvement
q The pressure loss has been improved by the straight air flow direction.
Blow gun
Series VMG Page 74
w Use small size nozzles to improve the effective area ratio with the upstream side.
Nozzles for blowing
Series KN Page 80
e Reduce pressure for optional usage. r Improve effective area by changing fittings.
Regulator Filter regulator S couplers
Series AR Page 108 Series AW Page 111 Series KK Page 83
Related Equipment
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve Series VXD21/22/23 P. 48
Pilot operated regulator Series AR425 to 935 109
Digital flow switch for air Series PF2A 118
High precision 2-color display digital pressure switch Series ZSE30/ISE30 154
High precision digital pressure switch Series ISE40 162
Compact manometer Series PPA 197
Polyurethane coil tubing Series TCU 107
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2 256
Hollow rod cylinders (Made to Order) 34
Free mount cylinder for vacuum Series ZCUK 35
Air leakage tester (Made to Order) 203
Front matter 10
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM11
Proposal 4
Air Tools
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air tools
Before Improvement
As in the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered and the factory line pressure is used directly.
Pressure (MPa)
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
Impact 1 cycle (6 sec) Time
wrench
After Improvement
Fittings and tubing are changed to those with large effective areas. A regulator is added and pressure control is improved.
0.5
0.4
S coupler 0.3
Before
0.2
improvement
0.1
0
1 cycle (4 sec)
Torque stability
Shortened cycle time
Before After
Front matter 11
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM12
Proposal 5
Air Leakage
Purpose
Stop air leakage from piping components
Before Improvement
20 to 50% of air consumption is accounted to air leakage.
Since the compressor is in continuous operation regardless of whether equipment is in
operation or at rest, a fixed amount of air is constantly consumed due to leakage from piping.
Air leakage is
equivalent to 20 to 50%.
Air
Air leakage, purging leakage
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Other
Non-operation time Operating time Time
• Air leakage from One-touch fittings • Air leakage from couplers due • Air leakage from tubing due to
due to bad cutting surface of tubing to bad sealing chips, wear-out and spatter, etc.
Leakage
Leakage Leakage
Front matter 12
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM13
Main Points
Sealed construction
for reduced leakage
Inner tube
Soft nylon
polyurethane
Exterior layer
Reduction
Before After
Front matter 13
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM14
Proposal 6
Air Purge (Air Micro)
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for air micro
Before Improvement
An air micro is used on machining equipment to confirm precision after machining.
Air is constantly released regardless of the presence of a workpiece.
Workpiece
After Improvement
The circuit is changed to supply air only when measuring workpieces.
Workpiece
2 port
air operated valve
3 port
mechanical valve
Main Points
Stop the air supply depending
on the presence of workpieces.
95%
Reduction
Related Equipment
Air catch sensor Series ISA2 P. 205
Before After Air catch sensor Series ISA 222
Front matter 14
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM15
Proposal 7
Paint Stirring
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for paint stirrer
Before Improvement
In a painting booth, it is necessary to have the stirrer in operation at all times to prevent paint from coagulating.
Even when the line is not in operation, air is supplied in the same manner as when it is in operation.
Paint tank
After Improvement
The circuit is changed to operate the stirrer with a minimal air supply when the line is not in operation.
Paint tank
Pilot operated
3 port solenoid valve
Flow switching
2 port air operated valve
Main Points
Switch the line flow rate
depending on the operating time
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement and non-operating time.
Flow switching 2 port air operated valve
Air consumption (Special order product)
100%
Series VKFA332-X1 Page 70
Before After
Front matter 15
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM16
Proposal 8
Actuators
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption by actuators
Before Improvement
Cylinder output uses the same pressure for lifting or lowering.
Use of an exterior guide adds extra weight.
After Improvement
By using a double power extension cylinder, a reduction in operating pressure or use of a smaller size
cylinder is made possible.
Use of a large bore tube rod and non-rotating mechanism makes the guide unnecessary.
Main Points
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement Change to a non-rotating
double power cylinder.
Air consumption 100% Non-rotating double power cylinder
Reduction
Before After
Front matter 16
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM17
After Improvement
q To reduce the non-working side output for a lifter when the jig weight is heavy and
the workpiece is light
Pressure is reduced in the direction that is influenced by the jig and workpiece load.
Regulator with
check valve
QFC valve
Main Points
Reduce pressure on the non-
working side.
(Change to a one side regulated circuit.)
Air saving valves
Regulator with check valve
Series ASR/ASQ Page 23
Series AR Page 110
Related Equipment
Guide table Series MGF P. 19
Model Selection Program Ver. 3.00 252
SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6 259
Front mater 17
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM18
Proposal 9
Vacuum Ejectors
Purpose
Reduction of air consumption for vacuum ejectors
Before Improvement
Normally, in the case of vacuum ejector suction, air needs to be constantly supplied to maintain the suction of a workpiece.
Standard ejector
Vacuum generation
Assumed to be 2 sec.
After Improvement
Use of an ejector with vacuum holding specification enables stopping air supply to maintain the suction at a workpiece.
Air consumption is reduced by shortening the vacuum generation ti me.
1.5 sec
0.5 sec
Note) Since vacuum pressure may drop
due to leakage, etc., use a pressure
–80 kpa switch to maintain the vacuum pres-
Workpiece sure necessary for the suction of a
work piece.
Main Points
Change to an ejector with built-in
check valve.
Vacuum ejector with check valve (Special
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement
order product) Page 234
Before After
Front matter 18
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM19
Before Improvement
For suction of a workpiece with leakage, a large suction flow is necessary, which in turn necessitates the
use of a larger nozzle size and increased air consumption.
Leakage –14
VAC.
55
Suction flow (l/min)
After Improvement
Use of an ejector with 3-stage diffuser construction enables a reduction of the air consumption even with
the same suction flow and vacuum pressure.
Nozzle size
ø1.2
Air consumption
63 l/min
–14
Leakage
55
Suction flow (l/min)
Main Points
Change to an ejector with
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement 3-stage diffuser construction.
Multistage ejector
Air consumption 100% Series ZL112/212 Page 229
58%
Reduction
Before After
Front matter 19
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM20
Proposal 10
Liquid Removal
Purpose
Reduction of air for a liquid removal pump
Before Improvement
Removal of oil waste accumulated in the oil pan under a machine or conveyor.
The pump is in operation regardless of the amount of liquid and this causes a great energy loss.
Air operated
P liquid removal pump
Oil waste
After Improvement
Suction method is changed to an ejector operated type and an automatic stop circuit is installed to stop
operation when there is no liquid.
Ejector
Machine
Water soluble coolants are directly
suctioned for removal by the
ejector.
Removal of oil based coolant
Ejector
Tank
Machine
Since oil based coolants are easily
vaporized, they are temporarily
stored in a tank.
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement
Before After
Front matter 20
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM21
Main Points
Start or stop the pump depending on the presence of liquid (waste).
Vacuum ejector for water soluble coolant removal Vacuum ejector (for oil based coolant removal)
(Special order product) Page 236 ZH Page 226
Discharge
side
Negative pressure
detection valve
Removal side
Related Equipment
In-line vacuum ejector Series ZU P. 228
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50 173
Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE5B/ISE5B 189
Front matter 21
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM22
Proposal 11
Coolant (Cleaning) Pump
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for coolant pump
Before Improvement
Coolant is blown without any attachment at the coolant outlet.
(electric power)
Pump head
Pressure
Pressure loss:
Large
After Improvement
Pressure loss is reduced by attaching nozzles.
Large diameter piping Small diameter nozzle
With nozzle S1
Pressure loss: Small
S2
Effective area
ratio 2:1
ø6
Pump head (electric power)
Pressure loss:
Small
P
Discharge Pump Nozzle
rate outlet outlet
Main Points
Improve pressure loss.
Improve the effective area ratio with
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement the upstream side by using a small
diameter nozzle.
Electric power
Nozzles for blowing Series KN Page 80
consumption 100%
75%
Reduction Related Equipment
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50 P. 173
2-color display digital pressure switch Series ISE70/75/75H 182
Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE5B/ISE5B 189
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2 256
Before After Industrial filter Series FG 238
Low maintenance filter Series FN1 240
Front matter 22
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM23
Before Improvement
For bed washing (chip washing), coolant is discharged constantly without any restraint.
Nozzle
For cutting
For jig (Blade cooling) KN
(Reference
surface cleaning)
Bed washing
(Washing chips)
Coolant flow/cycle
For cutting
For cutting For cutting
Flow rate
For jig For jig
Bed washing
P Bed washing
1 cycle
After Improvement
Bed washing is stopped when blowing for cutting or jig.
Coolant flow/cycle
The amount
For cutting
of reduction
is shown by
Flow rate
the shaded
For jig area.
For cutting For cutting
Main Points
Improve pressure loss.
Supply and stop coolant for bed washing.
Coolant valve
Series VNC Page 68
20 to 50%
Reduction
Related Equipment
High precision digital pressure switch for general fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50 P. 173
2-color display digital pressure switch Series ISE70/75/75H 182
Digital pressure switch with backlight Series ZSE5B/ISE5B 189
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2 256
Before After Industrial filter Series FG 238
Low maintenance filter Series FN1 240
Front matter 23
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM24
Proposal 12
Cooling Water
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for cooling water pump
Before Improvement
Regardless of operating or non-operating state of a welding gun, cooling water is constantly discharged.
Header
IN
P P Pump
OUT
Welder
After Improvement
Stop cooling water supply when not welding.
2 port
solenoid valve
Header
IN
P P Pump
OUT
Welder
Main Points
Stop the supply of cooling water
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement when not welding.
Zero differential pressure operated 2 port
Electric power 100% solenoid valve
consumption
Series VXZ Page 55
30 to 50%
Reduction
Related Equipment
Before After
Digital flow switch for water Series PF2W P. 118
Front matter 24
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM25
Proposal 13
Hydraulic Clamp
Purpose
Reduction of electric power consumption for hydraulic clamp
Before Improvement
A hydraulic unit is used for workpiece clamping when cutting is performed.
control valve
Hydraulic
cylinder
Hydraulic
M
Hydraulic
cylinder
Workpiece
Hydraulic
control valve
Hydraulic pump P
After Improvement
By performing air-hydro conversion for the clamping process, the use of the hydraulic unit is eliminated.
Cutting feed is electrically driven.
Air-hydro converter
Air-hydro booster
Main Points
Convert to high output
Effect of Energy Saving Improvement
hydraulic drive.
Air-hydro booster
Electric power 100%
consumption (Made to Order)
30 to 50% Page 42
Reduction
Air-hydro converter
Before After Series CCT
Page 45
Front matter 25
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM26
Proposal 14
Low Power Consumption/Long Service Life
Purpose
Reduction of power used for solenoid valve energization,
and service life improvement
After Improvement
Electric power used for solenoid valve energization is reduced by using low power consumption
solenoid valves.
Also, the use of a metal seal construction improves the service life.
Main Points
0.35 W/0.1 W
(with energy saving circuit)
For more details refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 1/2/17.
Front matter 26
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page FM27
Front matter 27
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 1
Actuators
Actuators
Series Application Page
Non-rotating double power cylinder MGZ Actuator 2
Guide table MGF Actuator 19
PFC/QFC valves PFC/QFC valves Actuator 21
Air saving valves ASR/ASQ Actuator 23
Hollow rod cylinders (Made to Order) Air blow 34
Free mount cylinder for vacuum ZCUK Air blow 35
Water resistant air cylinders Air leakage 36
Air cylinder with heavy duty scraper (Made to Order) Air leakage 40
Air cylinder with coil scraper (Made to Order) Air leakage 41
Air-hydro booster (Made to Order) Hydraulic clamp 42
Air-hydro converter CCT Hydraulic clamp 45
1
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 2
Non-rotating Double
Power Cylinder
Series MGZ ø40, ø50, ø63
Actuator
New
(Approx. 30%
reduction)
Shooter
Lifter
2
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 3
How to Order
Actuators
F Front flange style
G Rear flange style
— Grommet Yes
2-wire 24 V 12 V 100 V — Z73 — Relay, PLC
3-wire (NPN) Y69A Y59A
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
— 3-wire (PNP) Y7PV Y7P
Solid state switch
Switch spacer
Switch Spacer
Applicable bore size (mm) 40, 50, 63
Switch spacer BMP1-032
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) 40 50 60
Foot MGZ-L04 MGZ-L05 MGZ-L06
Flange MGZ-F04 MGZ-F05 MGZ-F06
3
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 4
Series MGZ
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Standard stroke: 0.08 MPa
Minimum operating pressure
Long stroke: 0.12 MPa
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (with no freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Lubrication Non-lube
Extending: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
Retracting: 50 to 450 mm/s
Stroke length tolerance to 250 +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
40, 50, 63
200, 250, 300 700, 800, 900,1000
Weight (kg)
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Basic style 1.90 3.03 4.83
Standard weight Foot style 2.39 3.92 6.08
Flange style 2.34 3.79 5.83
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke All brackets 0.39 0.59 0.78
4
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 5
Dimensions
Y
Y
Actuators
+0.2
4-MM depth M øXAH7 depth XL 0
øI
øD
2 x 4-J
E MB
KA MC MA
C K N N
B H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range B C D E KA GA GB H I J K M
40 to 1000 59 46 45 21 36 34.5 23.5 40 78 M6 x 1.0 25 10
50 to 1000 71 55 55 26 46 40 28 45 92 M8 x 1.25 25 14
63 to 1000 82 66 68 32 53 46.5 34.5 50 110 M8 x 1.25 25 14
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range MA MB MC MM N P S XA XL Y ZZ
40 to 1000 16 4 12 M6 x 1.0 44 1/4 138 12 6 9.5 178
50 to 1000 16 5 15 M8 x 1.25 50 1/4 150 16 6 12.5 195
63 to 1000 16 5 15 M8 x 1.25 56 1/4 171 16 6 15 221
5
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 6
Series MGZ
4-øLD through
LY
LH
LT
X/2
X X
LX Y LS + Stroke
LZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range X Y z LH LT LX LY LZ LS ZZ
40 to 1000 24 0 9 34 19 80 63.5 100 138 190
50 to 1000 32 1 11 40 22 96 75.5 120 148 210
63 to 1000 36 3 13 47 24 110 88 140 165 236
4-øFD
FY
B
FX FT
FZ (mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range B FD FT FX FY FZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125
63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138
Rear flange style: (G)
4-øFD
FY
B
FX FT
FZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range B FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100 190
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125 211
63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138 237
6
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 7
Construction
y @0 q o @2 i r t !7 @4 @1 e u !9 !8 @5 @3 w !6 !5 !1 !2 !0
Actuators
@6
!3 !4
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 14 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 15 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nickel plated
3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 16 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated
4 Piston rod Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 17 Bumper Urethane
5 Tube rod Carbon steel pipe Hard chrome plated 18 Wear ring Resin
6 Tube rod cover Carbon steel Electroless nickel plated 19 Magnet Magnetic material
7 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 20∗ Rod seal A NBR
8 Stationary piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 21 Rod seal B NBR
9 Bushing Lead bronze casting 22 Piston seal NBR
10 Thrust plate Lead bronze casting 23 Piston gasket NBR
11 Holder Aluminum alloy Chromated 24 Tube rod gasket NBR
12 Pin Carbon steel Zinc chromated 25∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
13 Tie-rod Carbon steel Corrosion resistant chromated 26 Coil scraper Metal
7
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 8
Series MGZ
How to Order
Stroke (mm)
Refer to the standard stroke table.
— Grommet Yes
2-wire 24 V 12 V 100 V — Z73 — Relay, PLC
3-wire (NPN) Y69A Y59A
5 V, 12 V IC circuit
— 3-wire (PNP) Y7PV Y7P
Solid state switch
Switch Spacer
Applicable bore size (mm) 40, 50, 63
Switch spacer BMP1-032
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Foot MGZ-L04 MGZ-L05 MGZ-L06
Flange MGZ-F04 MGZ-F05 MGZ-F06
8
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 9
Cylinder Specifications
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.2 MPa∗
Without auto switch: –10 to 70°C (with no freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Lubrication Non-lube
Actuators
Extending: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
Retracting: 50 to 450 mm/s
Stroke length tolerance to 250 +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Lock Specifications
End lock position Front only
Holding force (maximum) ø40 ø50 ø63
N 1770 2690 4160
Backlash 2mm or less
Manual release Non-locking type
Adjust an auto switch's position so that it operates for movement to both the stroke end and backlash (2 mm) positions.
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
40, 50, 63
200, 250, 300 700, 800, 900, 1000
Weight (kg)
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Basic style 2.80 4.08 6.13
Standard weight Foot style 3.29 4.97 7.39
Flange style 3.24 4.84 7.13
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke All brackets 0.41 0.61 0.80
9
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 10
Series MGZ
Construction
!3 !4
#7@1#5@2 @8@#
7 @
6 #
0 8
End lock
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 21 Lock holder Stainless steel
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 22 Lock piston Carbon steel Quenched, Hard chrome plated
3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 23 Stopper Carbon steel Quenched
4 Piston rod Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 24 Collar Lead-bronze casting
5 Tube rod Carbon steel pipe Hard chrome plated 25 Port block Bronze alloy Electroless nickel plated
6 Tube rod cover Carbon steel Electroless nickel plated 26 Pipe Bronze alloy
7 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 27 Lock spring Steel wire
8 Stationary piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 28 Rubber cap Synthetic rubber
9 Bushing Lead-bronze casting 29 ∗ Rod seal A NBR
10 Thrust plate Lead-bronze casting 30 Rod seal B NBR
11 Holder Aluminum alloy Chromated 31 Piston seal NBR
12 Pin Carbon steel Zinc chromated 32 Piston gasket NBR
13 Tie-rod Carbon steel Corrosion resistant chromated 33 Tube rod gasket NBR
14 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated 34 ∗ Cylinder tube gasket NBR
15 Hexagon socket head cap screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nickel plated 35 ∗ Lock piston seal A NBR
16 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated 36 ∗ Lock piston seal B NBR
17 Bumper Urethane 37 ∗ Lock piston seal C NBR
18 Wear ring Resin 38 ∗ Lock holder gasket NBR
19 Magnet Magnetic material 39 ∗ Port block gasket NBR
20 Cap Bronze alloy Electroless nickel plated 40 ∗ Pipe gasket NBR
10
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 11
Dimensions
Basic style
DL 2-Rc P GA
GB
Actuators
Y
WM
Y
4-MM depth M øXAH7 depth XL+0.2
0
LL LM
WL
øI
HR
øD
2 x 4-J
E MB
KA MC MA
C K NB N
B H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range B C D DL E GA GB H HR I J K KA LL LM
40 to 1000 59 46 45 58 21 34.5 23.5 40 57.5 78 M6 x 1.0 25 36 30 30
50 to 1000 71 55 55 67 26 40 28 45 63.5 92 M8 x 1.25 25 46 30 30
63 to 1000 82 66 68 73 32 46.5 34.5 50 69 110 M8 x 1.25 25 53 30 30
11
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 12
Series MGZ
4-øLD through
LY
LH
LT
X/2
X X
LX Y LS + Stroke
LZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range X Y LD LH LT LX LY LZ LS ZZ
40 to 1000 24 0 9 34 19 80 63.5 100 168 220
50 to 1000 32 1 11 40 22 96 75.5 120 181 243
63 to 1000 36 3 13 47 24 110 88 140 198 269
FX FT
FZ
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range B FD FT FX FY FZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125
Rear flange style: (G) 63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138
4-øFD
FY
B
FX FT
FZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size
(mm) Stroke range B FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100 220
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125 244
63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138 270
12
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 13
How to Order
Actuators
S 1 pc.
Mounting
Nil Basic style Auto switch type
L Transaxial foot style Without auto switch
F Front flange style Nil
(Built-in magnet cylinder)
G Rear flange style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model,
D Double clevis style refer to the table below.
∗ Auto switches are shipped together,
(but not assembled).
Bore size
40 40 mm
Stroke (mm)
50 50 mm Refer to “Standard Stroke” on the next page.
63 63 mm
—
Reed
— 5V — — Z76 — —
— Grommet Yes (NPN equiv) circuit
2-wire 24 V 12 V 100 V — Z73 — — Relay, PLC
3-wire (NPN) Y69A Y59A IC
5 V,12 V
Solid state switch
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ···············Nil (Example) Y59A ∗ Solid state switches marked “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m ··············· L (Example) Y59AL
5 m ··············· Z (Example) Y59AZ
• Retrofitting of an auto switch on a clinder that is originally ordered without one requires a switch spacer per the table below.
Switch spacer
Switch Spacer
Applicable bore size (mm) 40, 50, 63
Switch spacer BMP1-032
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size(mm) 40 50 63
Foot MGZ-L04 MGZ-L05 MGZ-L06
Flange MGZ-F04 MGZ-F05 MGZ-F06
Double clevis Note 1) MGZ-D04 MGZ-D05 MGZ-D06
Note 1) Double clevis bracket is provided with clevis pins and cotter pins.
13
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 14
Series MGZR
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Standard stroke: 0.08 MPa
Min. operating pressure
Long stroke: 0.12 MPa
Without auto switch: –10° to 70°C (With no freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: –10° to 60°C (With no freezing)
Lubrication Non-lube
OUT: 50 to 700 mm/s
Piston speed
IN: 50 to 450 mm/s
Stroke length tolerance Up to 250 +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000 0
Standard Stroke
Bore sizes (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Long stroke (mm)
75, 100, 125, 150, 175 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
40, 50, 63
200, 250, 300 700, 800, 900,1000
Weight (kg)
Bore size (mm) 40 50 63
Basic style 1.91 3.03 4.83
Foot style 2.39 3.92 6.08
Standard weight
Flange style 2.34 3.79 5.83
Double clevis style 2.19 3.47 5.62
Weight per each All mounting 0.39 0.59 0.78
50 mm of stroke brackets
14
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 15
Dimensions
Basic style
2-Rc P GA
GB
Actuators
Y
MM depth M
øI
øD
2 x 4-J
MB
KA MC MA
C K N N
B H S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range B C D KA GA GB H I J K M MA MB MC MM N P S Y ZZ
40 to 1000 59 46 45 36 34.5 23.5 40 78 M6 x 1.0 25 30 16 4 12 M16 x 2 44 1/4 138 9.5 178
50 to 1000 71 55 55 46 40 28 45 92 M8 x 1.25 25 35 16 5 15 M20 x 2.5 50 1/4 150 12.5 195
63 to 1000 82 66 68 53 46.5 34.5 50 110 M8 x 1.25 25 35 16 5 15 M20 x 2.5 56 1/4 171 15 221
15
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 16
Series MGZR
Dimensions: With Mounting Bracket
4-øLD through
LY
LH
LT
X
2
X X
LX Y LS + Stroke
LZ ZZ + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range X Y LD LH LT LX LY LZ LS ZZ
40 to 1000 24 0 9 34 19 80 63.5 100 138 190
50 to 1000 32 1 11 40 22 96 75.5 120 148 210
63 to 1000 36 3 13 47 24 110 88 140 165 236
FT
4-øFD (mm)
FX
Bore size Stroke
FZ (mm) range B FD FT FX FY FZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125
63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138
FT
4-øFD ZZ + Stroke
FX (mm)
FZ Bore size Stroke
(mm) range B FD FT FX FY FZ ZZ
40 to 1000 74 9 12 80 58 100 190
50 to 1000 78 9 16 100 61 125 211
63 to 1000 100 12 16 112 75 138 237
U
øCDH10
L CX
Z + Stroke RR CZ
ZZ + Stroke (mm)
Bore size Stroke
(mm) range L RR U CDH10 CX+0.3
+0.1 CZ Z ZZ
40 to 600 30 15 17 14 20 40 208 223
50 to 700 42 18 26 22 30 60 237 255
63 to 900 42 23 26 22 30 60 263 286
16
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 17
Z + Stroke DB B
DX
øDD
4-øDT
B
DH
Actuators
DS
DU DL DU 4-øDR DO DC DO
DA DE
Bore size
Model (mm) B DA DB DC DDH10 DE DH DL DO DR DS DT DU DX Z
+0.070
MB-B05 40 59 53 43 60 14 0 81 45 30 10.5 9 8 18 11.5 20 208
+0.084
50 71 73 64 86 22 0 111 65 45 12.5 11 10 22 14 30 237
MB-B08 +0.084
63 82 73 64 86 22 0 111 65 45 12.5 11 10 22 14 30 263
B°
°
90
Rotation
A° Bore size
(mm) A° Bˆ A°+B°+90°
40 30 50 170
50, 63 35 50 175
Clevis Pin
2-ød
øDd9
d
Bore size
Model
(mm) Dd9 L l m (Drill Cotter pin Note)
through)
m l CD-M05 40 14–0.050
–0.093 60 51 4.5 4 ø4 x 25 l
L CD-M08 50, 63 22–0.065
–0.117 82 72 5 4 ø4 x 35 l
Note) When using cotter pins, flat washers are used together.
Floating Joint
ø
(mm)
Applicable M Max. Allowable Max. operating tension and compression N Weight
Model Nominal A B C D E F G H screw-in eccentricity
bore size size
Pitch depth P U Compression Tension (kg)
40 JB80-16-200 16 2 80.5 16 20 50 9.5 19 16 32 18 1.25 18000 5000 0.56
50, 63 JB100-20-250 20 2.5 101 21 26 59.5 11.5 24 20 41 24 2 28000 7900 1.04
17
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 18
Series MGZR
Construction: MGZR
y !6 q o !8 i r t !4 @0 !7 e u @2 !5 @1 !9 w !3 !2
!0 !1
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 12 Hexagon socket head screw Chrome molybdenum steel Nickel plated
2 Head cover Aluminum alloy Clear anodized 13 Spring washer Steel wire Nickel plated
3 Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 14 Bumper Urethane rubber
4 Piston rod Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 15 Wear ring Resin
5 Tube rod Carbon steel Hard chromium electroplated 16∗ Rod seal A NBR
6 Tube rod cover Carbon steel Electroless nickel plated 17 Rod seal B NBR
7 Piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 18 Piston seal NBR
8 Stationary piston Aluminum alloy Chromated 19 Piston gasket NBR
9 Bushing Lead bronze casted 20∗ Tube rod gasket NBR
10 Tie-rod Carbon steel Corrosion resistant chromated 21 Cylinder tube gasket NBR
11 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel Nickel plated 22 Magnet Magnet
18
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 19
Guide Table
Series MGF ø40, ø63, ø100
Actuator
Compact type with reduced height.
A large bore guide cylinder with superior eccentric load
resistance and low profile.
Dramatically reduced
mounting height
Actuators
The compact design of the cylinder makes it possile to
reduce the overall size of equipment.
Mounting height
15 to 20% reduction
(compared to SMC series MGQ)
Series Variations
Bore size Standard stroke (mm) Auto switches
Model
(mm) Reed switches: D-Z7/Z8
30 50 75 100
MGF 40 40 Solid state switches: D-Y5/Y6/Y7
MGF 63 63 2-color indication solid state switch: D-Y7
Water resistant 2-color indication
MGF100 100 solid state switch: D-Y7BA
19
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 20
Series MGZR
How to Order
MGF 63 30 Z73
IC
3-wire — 5V — — Z76 —
Reed switch
circuit
Yes
Relay,
— Grommet 12 V 100 V — Z73 —
PLC
2-wire 24 V
5V 100 V IC
No — Z80 —
12 V or less circuit
3-wire
(NPN) Y69A Y59A
5V IC
3-wire 12 V circuit
— (PNP) Y7PV Y7P
Solid state switch
3-wire Relay,
Grommet Yes
(NPN)
24 V — Y7NWV Y7NW
Diagnostic 5V IC PLC
indication 3-wire 12 V circuit
Y7PWV Y7PW
(2-color (PNP)
indicator)
Y7BWV Y7BW
2-wire 12 V —
Water resistant
(2-color indicator) — Y7BAL —
∗ Lead wire length symbols 0.5 m .......... Nil (Example) Y59A PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
3 m ............. LY Y59AL
5 m ............. ZY Y59AZ
Model
PFC valve: A control valve Description Model Port size
Effective area (mm2) Weight
Regulated flow Free flow g
with pressure adjustment
ASR100 1/8 2.4 –– 97
and cylinder speed control ASR300 1/4, 3/8 14.5 –– 220
functions PFC valve
ASR500 1/2, 3/4 52.0 –– 580
QFC valve: A control valve ASR600 3/4, 1 80.0 –– 950
ASQ100 1/8 2.4 5.4 97
with quick exhaust and
ASQ300 1/4, 3/8 14.5 22.0 220
Actuators
cylinder speed control QFC valve
ASQ500 1/2, 3/4 52.0 68.0 580
functions ASQ600 3/4, 1 80.0 106.0 950
Specifications
Fluid Air
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa
PFC valve Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60°C
PFC valve 0.2 to 0.5 MPa
Set pressure
QFC valve 0.1 to 0.5 MPa
How to Order
ASR 100 –– 01 B
Product type Accessory
ASR PFC valve Nil Without bracket
ASQ QFC valve B With bracket
QFC valve
Body size Port size
100 1/8 Port size Applicable series
300 3/8 01 1/8 ASR100, ASQ100
500 3/4 02 1/4 ASR300, ASQ300
600 1 03 3/8 ASR300, ASQ300
04 1/2 ASR500, ASQ500
Patent pending Thread type 06 3/4 ASR500, 600, ASQ500, 600
Nil Rc 10 1 ASR600, ASQ600
N NPT
F G
Symbol
21
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 22
PFC/QFC valves
System Circuit
25% reduction of air consumption Work stroke
It is not necessary to supply high
pressure to both the extension and Return stroke
retraction sides of a piston. On the non-
working side, it is sufficient to supply
just enough pressure (0.2 MPa) for the
QFC valve PFC valve
piston to operate smoothly within the set
time. A reduction system using PFC and
QFC valves reduces air consumption by
25%, which translates into reduced
running cost and dramatic reduction of
equipment cost.
500
3 0 0
ø6 ø8 ø10
0
400
ø5
e
siz
re
200
Bo
100
0
2,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000
Air consumption reduction [m3/year (ANR) (Nm3/year)]
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48
Annual air consumption cost reduction (Thousand yen)
PH
sp
m
lin ed
D
e PH PR
Cy
ov
de co
lind
r m tr
PR er m
er
g
sin
Pressure
mo
ov ol v
Pressure
d
n
lin tue
ve
em al
Stroke
y
Stroke
n
me
C e lv
en e
PR
nt
em va
tu
us
ov trol
v
B
ing
sin
m
r on
aQ
de c E PH
a
FC
lin eed F
y
va
C sp
lve
a
A Time Time
During the work stroke, the cylinder moves quickly To prevent time lag, air is quickly exhausted from D
from A to B due to the difference between the head to E, after which the piston moves at a constant
side pressure (PH) and rod side pressure (PR). speed. When a speed controller is used instead of a
Cylinder speed is then controlled by a PFC valve QFC valve, the time required for exhaust becomes
from B to C. Therefore, the cylinder speed remains longer as shown by the D to F line of the head side
the same for a shorter length of time than it did pressure (PH). This causes a longer stopping time for
previously. the cylinder and time loss.
22
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 23
Cuts air consumption by operating
the return stroke at a reduced pressure.
Conventional Valve Air Saving Valve
Working and return strokes Return stroke operated
operated at the same pressure at a reduced pressure
Actuators
Pressure Flow
valve valve
Working stroke
Return stroke
Smooth operation of working and return strokes possible.
Consistent speed control achieved by preventing jerky movement of working strokes.
Improved response time
Operation delay in a return stroke is reduced by the use of a quick supply and exhaust valve.
Easy piping The set pressure can be either fixed or variable.
The body and one-touch fitting allow 360° Fixed set pressure type Variable set pressure type
rotation. The sealant on the male thread is (Fixed at 0.2 MPa) (Variable between Graduated knob
standardized. 0.1 and 0.3 MPa)
2
3
Body
24
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 25
ASR 4 3 0 F 02 06 S F20
Actuators
Body size (0.1 to 0.3 MPa)
4 1/4 standard Fixed set pressure type
Regulator with check valve and flow control F20
5 3/8 standard (0.2 MPa)
valve integrated into a single construction
6 1/2 standard
Applicable tubing O.D.
Type 06 6 mm
3 Universal 08 8 mm
10 10 mm
With One-touch fitting 12 12 mm
Port size
02 R 1/4
03 R 3/8
04 R 1/2
Flow valve: Series ASQ
Model
25
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 26
Effective Area
Pressure Valve: Series ASR Flow Valve: Series ASQ
Type Free flow Controlled flow Type Meter-out Meter-in
(mm2) (mm2) (mm2) (mm2)
ASR430F-02-06S(-F20) 5.4 5.9 ASQ430F-02-06S(-F20) 4.1 4.9
ASR430F-02-08S(-F20) 5.9 6.7 ASQ430F-02-08S(-F20) 4.6 5.5
ASR430F-02-10S(-F20) 5.9 6.7 ASQ430F-02-10S(-F20) 4.6 5.5
ASR530F-02-06S(-F20) 7.3 8.1 ASQ530F-02-06S(-F20) 6.6 7.8
ASR530F-02-08S(-F20) 8.9 11.8 ASQ530F-02-08S(-F20) 9.2 10.1
ASR530F-02-10S(-F20) 9.2 13.3 ASQ530F-02-10S(-F20) 9.8 10.8
ASR530F-02-12S(-F20) 9.5 13.7 ASQ530F-02-12S(-F20) 10.8 11.6
ASR530F-03-06S(-F20) 7.3 8.1 ASQ530F-03-06S(-F20) 6.6 7.8
ASR530F-03-08S(-F20) 8.9 11.8 ASQ530F-03-08S(-F20) 9.2 10.1
ASR530F-03-10S(-F20) 9.2 13.3 ASQ530F-03-10S(-F20) 9.8 10.8
ASR530F-03-12S(-F20) 9.5 13.7 ASQ530F-03-12S(-F20) 10.8 11.6
ASR630F-03-10S(-F20) 15.3 17.8 ASQ630F-03-10S(-F20) 15.3 17.1
ASR630F-03-12S(-F20) 16.0 19.1 ASQ630F-03-12S(-F20) 16.2 18.0
ASR630F-04-10S(-F20) 15.3 17.8 ASQ630F-04-10S(-F20) 15.3 17.1
ASR630F-04-12S(-F20) 16.0 19.1 ASQ630F-04-12S(-F20) 16.2 18.0
Operating Principle
Working Stroke Return Stroke
Cy eed
sp
D
lin co
Cy flo
t
B C
em r
en
PR
de n
ov e
by
Pressure, Stroke
Pressure, Stroke
lin w v
m ylind
PH
r m ro
de al
ov l va
C
r m ve
t
em lve
ov
PH A
en
em
PR
tb
PH
en
y
F
t
PR
PR
E PH
Time Time
1. The cylinder starts smoothly because jerks are prevented by 3. To prevent delay due to the pressure gap, air is rapidly
meter-in control. exhausted to decrease the pressure from D to E, after which
the piston moves at a constant speed. If a speed controller is
Jerk used instead of the flow valve, exhausting air will take more
prevention time as illustrated by line D-F, resulting in longer stop time of
the cylinder and a consequent time loss.
Quick exhaust
Working stroke
Return stroke
2. When the cylinder reaches the stroke end, the quick air charge
by the flow valve rapidly increases the rear side pressure (PH)
from A to B. If a speed controller is used instead of the flow
valve, charging air will take more time as illustrated by line A-
C, causing delay in the pressure rise. 4. The cylinder operates at a low pressure required for a return.
Low pressure
Quick supply operation
26
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 27
Flow Characteristics
Pressure Valve: Series ASR (Inlet pressure: 0.5 MPa)
ASR430F ASR530F ASR630F
20
Flow rate l/min (ANR)
Actuators
2 4
100 5
0 5 10 0 5 10 0 5 10
Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations
0 5 10 0 5 10 0 5 10
Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations
0 5 10 0 5 10 0 5 10
Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations Number of needle rotations
ASR430F/530F ASR630F
0.4 0.4
Set pressure 0.3 MPa Set pressure 0.3 MPa
0.3 0.3
P2: Outlet pressure
0 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
P1: Inlet pressure P1: Inlet pressure
27
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 28
Horizontal mounting
Low pressure side: Pressure valve
High pressure side: Flow valve
Vertical mounting
Low pressure side: Pressure valve
High pressure side: Flow valve
Working stroke
Return stroke
If the load ratio at the set pressure of the flow valve exceeds
50%, install a dual speed controller (meter-in and meter out
control) on the high pressure side.
Pressure valve
Series Low pressure side
ASR Refer to
Adjustment Procedure 2
Dual speed controller for pressure and speed adjustment.
(Meter-in • Meter-out)
Series High pressure side
ASQ
28
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 29
Adjustment Procedure 1
Pressure Adjustment Speed Control
1. The fixed set pressure type (-F20) does not require adjustment 1. The cylinder speed is adjusted with knobs C , D and E . First
because the pressure is fixed at 0.2 MPa for both the pressure have all the knobs fully closed and then open them gradually
valve and the flow valve. for adjustment. Turn the knob clockwise to close (decrease the
2. The set pressures of the variable set pressure type pressure speed of the piston rod) and counterclockwise to open
valve and flow valve are adjusted with knob A and knob B (increase the speed of the piston rod).
respectively. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the pressure 2. Speed adjustment for the working stroke
and counterclockwise to decrease the pressure. The speed is adjusted with the pressure valve and the flow
Actuators
3. The graduations 1, 2 and 3 correspond to 0.1, 0.2 and 0.3 valve.
MPa respectively. Align the bottom end of the knob with the Open knobs C and E gradually until the required speed is
graduated line for adjustment. achieved. Make sure that knobs C and E are opened by the
same number of rotations.
Knob Align the bottom end of the Note 1) If the piston rod jerks, close knob E until the smooth
knob with the graduated line. operation is achieved.
The figure illustrates the case 3. Speed adjustment for return stroke
in which the pressure is set at
2
3
0.2 MPa.
The speed is adjusted with the flow valve.
Open knob D gradually until the required speed is achieved.
4. Be sure to tighten the lock nut after adjustment.
4. Set the same pressure for the pressure valve and the flow
valve (0.2 MPa as the recommended value).
5. The inlet side should be supplied with a pressure which is
higher than the set pressure by 0.1 MPa or more.
6. Cap the valve after adjustment.
Adjustment Procedure 2
Pressure Adjustment Speed Control
1. The fixed set pressure type (-F20) does not require adjustment 1. The cylinder speed is adjusted with knobs C , F and G . First
because the pressure is fixed at 0.2 MPa. have all the knobs fully closed and then open them gradually
2. The pressure at the low pressure side (return stroke side) is for adjustment. Turn the knob clockwise to close (decrease the
adjusted by the pressure valve. speed of the pistoin rod) and counterclockwise to open
3. The set pressure is adjusted with knob A . Turn the knob (increase the speed of the piston rod).
clockwise to increase the pressure and counterclockwise to 2. Speed adjustment for the working stroke
decrease the pressure. The speed is adjusted with the pressure valve and the dual
4. The graduations 1, 2 and 3 correspond to 0.1, 0.2 and 0.3 speed controller.
MPa respectively. Align the bottom end of the knob with the Open knobs C and G gradually until the required speed is
graduated line for adjustment. achieved. Make sure that knobs C and G are opened by the
5. Keep the set pressure as low as possible in order to achieve same number of rotations.
good air saving effect. Note 1) If the piston rod jerks, close knob G until the smooth
6. Cap the valve after adjustment. operation is achieved.
3. Speed adjustment for return stroke
The speed is adjusted with the dual speed controller.
Open knob F gradually until the required speed is achieved.
4. Be sure to tighten the lock nut after adjustment.
29
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 30
Construction
Pressure Valve: Series ASR
Variable type Fixed type
@1 @2 @5 @4 @3 @1 @2 @5 @4 @3
Actuators
ASQ430F-02 type i ASQ430F-02 type
ASQ530F-03 type u ASQ530F-03 type o
ASQ630F-04 type
y ASQ630F-04 type !5
!7 !5 !3
!7
!2 !4
!6 !6
!4 !1
!8 !1 !8
w w
q q
@0 @0
e e
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7 @1 !0 !9 !6 !7
i
ASQ530F-02 type ASQ530F-02 type
ASQ630F-03 type u ASQ630F-03 type
y
y !5
!7 !5 !3
!7
!2 !4
!8 !8
!4 !1
!6 !6
!1
t t
q q
@0 @0
r r
@1 !0 !9 !6 !7 @1 !0 !9 !6 !7
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Body A PBT 14 Piston valve HNBR/Brass
2 Body B Brass Electroless nickel plated 15 Adjustment spring Steel wire Zinc chromated
3 Seat ring Brass Electroless nickel plated 16 Needle Brass Electroless nickel plated
4 Body B1 Brass Electroless nickel plated 17 Knob PBT
5 Body B2 Brass Electroless nickel plated 18 Lock nut Note 1) Steel Electroless nickel plated
6 Adjustment screw Brass Electroless nickel plated 19 Lock nut Note 1) Steel Black zinc chromated
7 Knob Brass Electroless nickel plated 20 U seal HNBR
8 Cap Polypropylene 21 U seal HNBR
9 Adjustment plug Brass Electroless nickel plated 22 Elbow body PBT
10 Body C Brass Electroless nickel plated 23 Spacer Note 2) PBT
11 Body D1 Brass Electroless nickel plated 24 Cassette Stainless steel/POM
12 Body D2 Brass Electroless nickel plated 25 Seal NBR
13 Body D3 Brass Electroless nickel plated 26 Drive body Note 3) Brass Electroless nickel plated
Note 1) Brass is used for the material ASQ530F and ASQ630F.
Note 2) Not used for ø6 and ø8.
Note 3) Not used for ø10 and ø12.
31
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 32
Dimensions
Pressure Valve: Series ASR
Variable set pressure type Fixed set pressure type (-F20)
L1 L1
L2 d L2 d
M M
øD1
øD
2 øD1 øD
2
L6
L6
L3 L4
H H
(Width across (Width across
flats) flats)
øD3
øD3
A1
A1
L5
L5
A2
A2
T T
32
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 33
L1 L1
L2 d L2 d
M M
Actuators
øD øD
2 2
L8
L8
L3 L3
L4 L4
H
H
(Width across
flats) (Width across
flats)
øD4 øD4
L5
L6
A1
A1
øD1
øD3
øD1
øD3
L7
L7
A2
A2
T T
33
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 34
A hollow rod for vacuum piping is utilized for air flow.
The nozzle position can be moved.
Nozzle
Specifications other than above Specifications are the same as series CM2W.
ød
HA + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke
Dimensions
7 + Stroke
60 + 2 x Stroke
34
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 35
How to Order
Actuators
C –– Cap piping/Male thread D –– Double acting
Auto switch type
D –– Cap piping/Direct pad mount
Nil Without auto switch
Q –– Rod piping/Male thread
R –– Rod piping/Direct pad mount Port thread type ∗ Select applicable auto switch
models from the table below.
Bore size Symbol Type Bore size ∗ Auto switches are shipped together
10 –– 10 mm M5 x 0.8 ø10, ø16, ø20, ø25 (but not assembled).
Nil
16 –– 16 mm Rc 1/8 ø32
20 –– 20 mm TN NPT 1/8 ø32 Standard stroke (mm)
25 –– 25 mm TF Note) G 1/8 ø32 10, 16 ––––– 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
32 –– 32 mm Note) In the case of rod piping (Q, R), 20, 25, 32 –– 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50
TF (G 1/8) is not available.
Applicable Auto Switches
Indicator light
— — — — —
switch
circuit
Reed
Grommet
(NPN equiv.)
—
12 V 100 V A93V A93 — — — Relay,
2-wire 24 V
PLC
No
—
switch
Grommet 24 V —
Diagnostic 3-wire (NPN) F9NWV F9NW PLC
indication 5 V, 12 V IC circuit
2 color 3-wire (PNP) F9PWV F9PW
indicator 2-wire 12 V F9BWV F9BW —
Note 1) Lead wire length symbols 0.5 m .......... Nil (Example) M9N Note 2) Solid state switches marked with a "" symbol are produced upon
3 m ............. L (Example) M9NL receipt of order.
5 m ............. Z (Example) M9NZ
Piping type Free mount cylinder for vacuum Rod end configuration Applicable pad type
For detailed specifications,
refer to the next page.
ZCUKC
Cap piping Vacuum Male thread
Series ZPT
ZCUKD (Perpendicular vacuum
entry female thread)
Cap piping Vacuum Direct pad mount
Vacuum
ZCUKQ
Rod piping Vacuum Male thread Series ZP
(With pad single unit
lock ring)
ZCUKR
Vacuum
Rod piping Vacuum Direct pad mount
35
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 36
øE-0.05
0
Cushion Rubber bumper
Auto switch mounting Band mount type
(øE1)
Made to order Stainless steel piston rod and rod end nut (-XC6)
Note) Specifications other than above are the same as the standard basic type.
(F1) TA
Dimensions S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke
NN1 NN2
WA
Air cushion GA
øE–0.05
øE2h8
øE1h8
0
(øE1)
(mm)
Bore size (mm) E1 E2∗ NN1 NN2∗
0
22 –0.033 0
20 –0.033 M22 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 (F1) TA
20
Note) Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard double S + Stroke F
acting single rod type. [An asterisk (∗) indicates those that are the same as
standard.] ZZ + Stroke
Please contact SMC for part numbers of the foot, the flange and the (mm)
mounting nut for ø20. Bore size (mm) (E1) E∗ (F1) F∗ GA S TA WA ZZ
32 17 18 2 2 18 77 (85) 17 22 119 (127)
40 21 25 2 2 19 84 (93) 18 22 136 (145)
50 26 30 2 2 21 97 (109) 20 25 157 (169)
63 26 32 2 2 21 97 (109) 20 25 157 (169)
80 32 40 3 3 28 116 (130) — 30 190 (204)
100 37 50 3 3 29 117 (131) — 31 191 (205)
Note 1) Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard double
acting single rod type. [An asterisk (∗) indicates those that are the same
as standard.]
Note 2) Dimensions inside ( ) are for long strokes.
36
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 37
Compact Cylinder
Series CQ2 ø20 to ø100
Actuators
CDQ2 Mounting Bore size Port thread type R Stroke D Option F9BAL -XC6
Cylinder bore size (mm) ø20, ø25, ø32, ø40, ø50, ø60, ø80, ø100
With auto switch Mounting ø20 to ø32 ... B (Through-hole only)
(Built-in magnet) ø40 to ø100 ... B (Through-hole) F (Front flange style)
A (Both end tapped) G (Rear flange style)
Water resistant cylinder
L (Foot style) D (Double clevis style)
R Seal, NBR (Nitrile rubber)
V Seal, FKM (Fluoro rubber) Cushion None
Water resistant 2-color indication Auto switch mounting Rail mount type (D-F7BAL, F7BAVL)/Direct mount type (D-F9BAL)
solid state switch
Made to order Stainless steel snap ring, piston rod and rod end nut (-XC6)
F7BA(V)L ø20 to ø100
Note) Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
F9BAL ø32 to ø100
Dimensions
øT
C C
Rod end nut Rod end nut
X L3 X L3
L2 L2
ø40, ø50 ø63 to ø100 ø20 to ø32 ø40 to ø100
CDA2 Mounting Type Bore size Port thread type R Stroke Suffix Y7BAL -XC6 MGPM Bore size Port thread type R Stroke Y7BAL
Dimensions Dimensions
FB
B + Stroke
A + Stroke
(mm)
A (A)
Bore size
(mm) 50 50 stroke or more 200 B FB
stroke or less 200 stroke or less stroke or more
20 66 97.5 135 66 19
25 67.5 99 136 67.5 20
32 109 114 152 71.5 22
40 109 114 152 78 22
50 117.5 129 172 83 23
63 117.5 129 172 88 23
80 121 148 199 102.5 24
100 141 166 207 120 29
∗ Dimensions other than above are the same as the standard double acting
single rod type.
38
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 39
Guide Cylinder
Series MGG ø32 to ø100
How to Order
Actuators
H7BAL -XC6
Slide bearing
Water resistant cylinder
R Seal, NBR (Nitrile rubber)
V Seal, FKM (Fluoro rubber)
Water resistant 2-color indication
solid state switch
H7BAL ø32 to ø63
G5BAL ø80, ø100
Made to order specification
Specifications
Made to order -XC6A Stainless steel used on all standard iron parts
specification -XC6B Stainless steel rod end moving parts
-XC6C Stainless steel rod parts
∗ Specifications other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
Note 1) RBL (coolant resistant) shock absorbers are used.
Dimensions
ø32 to ø50 ø63 to ø100
Front mounting flange style Front mounting flange style
Q Q
X Y + Stroke X Y + Stroke
(mm)
Bore size (mm) Q X Y
32 25 39 86 (94)
40 29 46 96 (105)
50 31 57 109 (121)
63 34 56 112 (124)
80 46 68 137 (151)
100 47 68 138 (152)
∗ Dimensions inside ( ) are for long strokes.
∗ Dimensions other than the above are the same as the standard basic type.
39
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 40
Air Cylinder
with Heavy Duty Scraper Made to Order
Air Leakage
Symbol
CM2 Mounting Bore size Stroke Cushion XC4 CB Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4
(With rear lock only)
CG1 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4 CQ2 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4
CA2 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4 CV Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4
CS1 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4 MGG Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4
MB Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4 MGC Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC4
The heavy duty scraper feature is ideal for cylinders used in a dusty
environment, or in environments where there is contact with earth and
sand, such as molding machines, construction equipment, and industrial
vehicles, etc.
Specifications
Applicable End lock cylinder Cylinder Compact
Air cylinder/Standard type (with rear with valve cylinder Guide cylinder
cylinder lock only)
Action Double acting, Single rod, Double rod (Not applicable for CG1) Double acting, Single rod Double acting
Bore size 20, 25, 32, 32, 40, 50, 32, 40, 50, 40, 50, 63, 125, 140, 160, 180, 20, 25, 32, 40, 20, 25, 32, 40, 20, 25, 32, 40,
32, 40, 50
(mm) 40 63 63, 80, 100 80, 100 200, 250, 300 50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100 50, 63, 80, 100
Wiper ring SCB scraper
CBM2: CVM5: None Rubber bumper Air cushion
Rubber Rubber
Air cushion Rubber bumper Rubber bumper Rubber (base cylinder (base cylinder
Cushion bumper bumper
CBA1: CV3, CVS1:
Air cushion Air cushion bumper unit) unit)
Air cushion Air cushion
Auto switch Mountable (Bores sizes 200mm or less.)
Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications are Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications
and the same as the
are the same are the same are the same are the same standard type are the same are the same are the same are the same are the same
dimensions as the as the as the as the as the as the as the as the
except dimension as the
other than standard type. standard type. standard type. standard type. K has been standard type. standard type. standard type. standard type. standard type.
above changed.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6/7/8/10 for the pages listed in the table above for details.
Caution
Do not replace the heavy duty scraper.
• Since the heavy duty scraper is press fit, replace the rod
cover assembly instead of the cover only.
(In the case of the CM2 series, it cannot be replaced.)
(For the CS1 series, replace the retaining plate
assembly.)
M Specifications
MGP L Bore size Stroke XC4
Applicable series MGPM, MGPL
With heavy duty scraper
Bearing type Slide bearing, Ball bushing
Scraper specification Cylinder bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
Nil Single side scraper
Double side scraper Minimum Single side 0.12 MPa
W
operating pressure Double side 0.14 MPa
40
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 41
Air Cylinder
with Coil Scraper Made to Order Air Leakage
Symbol
With coil scraper -XC35
CM2 Mounting Bore size Stroke XC35 MB Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35
CQ2 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35 CA2 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35
CG1 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35 CS1 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35
With coil scraper
Removes frost, welding spatter, and machining chips from the piston rod,
CBA1 Follow the standard ordering procedures. XC35
Actuators
and protects the seals.
With coil scraper
Specifications
Applicable series Air cylinder/Series CM2 Air cylinder/Series CG1 Compact air cylinder/Series CQ2 Air cylinder/Series CA2
Action Double acting, Single rod Double acting, Single rod Double acting, Single rod Double acting, Single rod, Double rod
Applicable bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa 1.0 MPa 1.0 MPa 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.05 MPa 0.05 MPa Single rod: 0.05 MPa, Double rod: 0.08 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper Rubber bumper, Air cushion None, Rubber bumper Air cushion
Scraper Coil scraper (Metal)
Auto switch Mountable
Basic, Axial foot, Front flange, Basic, Axial foot, Front flange, Through holes, Basic, Foot, Front flange, Rear
Rear flange, Single clevis, Rear flange, Front trunnion, Double end tapped flange, Single clevis, Double
Mounting Double clevis, Front trunnion, Rear trunnion, Clevis (used clevis, Center trunnion
Rear trunnion, Integral clevis, when the port location is
Boss cut moved 90°)
Specifications are the same as Specifications are the same as Specifications are the same as Specifications are the same as
Specifications other than above the standard type. the standard type. the standard type. the standard type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6/7 for the pages listed in the table above.
Specifications
Applicable series Air cylinder/Series MB Air cylinder/Series CS1 End lock cylinder/Series CBA2
Action Double acting, Single rod Double acting, Single rod, Double rod Double acting, Single rod
Applicable bore size (mm) 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 250, 300 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa 0.97 MPa 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.05 MPa 0.15 MPa
Cushion Air cushion, Rubber bumper Air cushion Air cushion
Scraper Coil scraper (Metal)
Auto switch Capable (Bores sizes 200mm or less.)
Basic, Foot, Front flange, Rear Basic, Foot, Front flange, Rear Basic, Foot, Front flange,
flange, Single clevis, Double flange, Single clevis, Double Single clevis, Double clevis,
Mounting clevis, Shaft type trunnion clevis, Center trunnion (For Center trunnion
double rod, only Basic, Foot,
Front flange, Center trunnion
are available.)
Specifications are the same as Specifications are the same as the Specifications are the same as
Specifications other than above the standard type. standard type. the standard type.
Refer to Best Pneumatics 2004 catalog Vol. 6 for the pages listed
in the table above.
Specifications
Applicable series MGPM
MGPM Bore size Stroke XC35 Bearing type Slide bearing
Cylinder bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
With coil scraper
Minimum Single side 0.12 MPa
Scraper specification operating pressure
Double side 0.14 MPa
Nil Single side scraper
W Double side scraper
41
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 42
Converts air pressure to hydraulic pressure for high pressure
hydraulic cylinder actuation.
CA1B H63 50 1 XB4
Type of pressurization
Mounting Nil Pressurized when energized
B Basic style B Not pressurized when energized
L Axial foot style
G Rear flange style
Electrical entry
Nil Molded type
25 25 cm3 Voltage
40 40 cm3 1 100 VAC
50 50 cm3 2 200 VAC
75 75 cm3 5 24 VDC
100 100 cm3 9 Other
Specifications
Operating fluid Compressed air
Driving fluid ISO VG32
Operating pressure (air) 0.3 to 0.7 MPa
Withstand pressure (air) 1.6 MPa Specifications other than -XB4 are available by
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60°C special order. Select according to the usage.
Intensified pressure ratio 1:6 (Refer to the following two pages for the list of
Reservoir capacity (oil pot capacity) 110 cm3 special order products.)
Dimensions
CA1BH63(XB4)/Basic style
Oil supply View A (Oil port position)
90 ø73 plug
30.4 Supply port 30°
O.D. ø6 tubing
2-Rc 1/8
12
ø50
Exhaust port
77
≈ 153
15
12 Rc 1/4 13
Rc 1/4 Oil port
11 6.5
Oil port
≈161
View A
40
42.5
42
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 43
Air-hydro Booster
23
2-Rc 3/8
(air port)
Air release
Actuators
≈154
Rc 1/2 18
(oil port)
65
162
137
23
Air release
4-ø13
6 72 35 77 42.5
117 112 209 23 7
1 380
CS1LH160-Q5731-160
Intensified pressure ratio 1 : 16
Oil discharge volume: 160 cm3 ø73
4-M16 x 1.5
18.5 2-Rc 3/4 18.5
12
≈211
140
15
Rc 1
197
4-Long hole
106
54 View A
8.5 8.5
72 25 50 39 39 50 25
118 10.5 243 283
.5
144 383 R9
19
182 611.5 .5
R9
View A
CS1LH200-Q3496-130
Intensified pressure ratio 1 : 25
Oil discharge volume: 131 cm3
4-M20 x 1.5 18.5 2-Rc 3/4 18.5
4-M12 x 1.5
Rc 1/2
≈272.5
245
132
4-ø24
10
63
85 30 60 39 39 60 30
150 14 229 241
182 361
226 574
43
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 44
Air-hydro Booster
Rc 11/4
(discharge port)
245
4-ø24
132
10
63
85
150 30 60 39 39 60 30
182 14 646 656
226 776
1406
44
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 45
Air-hydro Converter
Series CCT Hydraulic Clamp
How to Order
CCT 63 100
Air-hydro converter Effective oil level stroke (mm)
Actuators
63 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500
100 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600
160 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
Specifications
Operating pressure 0 to 0.7 MPa
Proof pressure 1.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 50°C
Fluid Turbine oil (40 to 100 cSt)
45
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 46
46
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 47
Directional Control
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve VXD21/22/23 Air blow, Air tool, Non-operation 48
Direct operated 2 port solenoid valve VCA Air blow, Air tool 51
Equipment
Pilot operated 2 port solenoid valve VQ20/30 Air blow, Air tool 53
Zero differential pressure operated Cooling water
VXZ 55
2 port solenoid valve
Direct air operated 2 port valve VXA21/22 Air purge 57
Pilot operated 3 port solenoid valve VP300/500/700 Air purge, Paint stirring 58
Pilot operated 3 port solenoid valve VG342 Air purge, Non-operation 60
Large 3 port solenoid valve VP3145/3165/3185 Air purge, Non-operation 62
3 port mechanical valve VM1000 VM100/200/400 Air purge 64
Coolant valve VNC Coolant 68
Flow switching 2 port air operated valve (Special order product) Paint stirring 70
Booster valve VBA1110 to 4200 Hydraulic clamp 71
47
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 48
Models/Valve specifications
Normally Closed (N.C.)
Connection Flow coefficient Min. operating Max. operating pressure differential (MPa) Max.
Orifice Effective pressure system Weight∗
Model Water Air Oil pressure (g)
Thread Flange (ømm) Cv area differential
(mm2) (MPa) AC DC AC DC AC DC (MPa)
14 — 10 1.9 34 VXD2130-02 0.02 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.4 420
38
— 10 2.4 43 VXD2130-03 0.02 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.4 420
— 15 4.5 80 VXD2140-03 0.02 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 670
12
— 10 2.4 43 VXD2130-04 0.02 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.4 500
— 15 5.5 100 VXD2140-04 0.02 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 1.5 670
34 — 20 9.5 170 VXD2150-06 0.02 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 1150
1 — 25 12.5 225 VXD2260-10 0.02 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 1650
— 32A 35 23 415 VXD2270-32 0.03 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 5400
— 40A 40 31 560 VXD2380-40 0.03 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 6800
— 50A 50 49 880 VXD2390-50 0.03 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 8400
∗ Weight for grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, and 60 g for terminal type.
Models/Valve specifications
Normally Open (N.O.) Min. operating Max. operating pressure
Connection Flow coefficient Max.
Orifice Effective Model
pressure differential (MPa) system Weight∗
Thread Flange (ømm) Cv area differential pressure (g)
(mm2) (MPa) Water, Air Oil (MPa)
38 — 15 4.5 80 VXD2142-03 0.02 0.7 0.6 690
12 — 15 5.5 100 VXD2142-04 0.02 0.7 0.6 690
34 — 20 9.5 170 VXD2152-06 0.02 0.7 0.6 1170
1 — 25 12.5 225 VXD2262-10 0.02 0.7 0.6 1.5 1690
— 32A 35 23 415 VXD2272-32 0.03 0.7 0.6 5400
— 40A 40 31 560 VXD2382-40 0.03 0.7 0.6 6800
— 50A 50 49 880 VXD2392-50 0.03 0.7 0.6 8400
∗ Weight for grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, and 60 g for terminal type.
Solenoid specifications
Symbol Power Frequency Apparent power (VA) Power consumption Temperature increase (°C)
Model supply (Hz) Inrush Energized (W) (energized) (rated voltage)
OUT 50 25 12 5 50
AC
VXD21 60 20 8 3.5 35
DC — — — 6 50
IN 50 45 20 8 55
AC
VXD22 60 40 15 6.5 45
DC — — — 8 50
50 60 25 10.5 60
AC
VXD23 60 50 20 9.5 50
DC — — — 11.5 55
Note 1) The values are for ambient temperature of 20°C ±5°C and rated voltage.
Note 2) When in operation, AC to DC or DC to AC exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
Note 3) Reset voltage is 20% or more of rated voltage for AC, and 5% or more of rated voltage for DC.
Note 4) Allowable voltage fluctuation is ±10% of rated value for both AC and DC.
48
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 49
Pilot Operated
2 Port Solenoid Valve Series VXD21/22/23
The updated individual catalog
(CAT.ES70-29A) will be available shortly.
VXD21
VXD22 0
VXD23 Bracket
Nil –––– None
B ––––– With bracket
Thread connection for 02 to
10 is possible.
Electrical option
Nil –– None
S ––– With surge voltage suppressor
Body size L ––– With indicator light
3 10A Z ––– With surge voltage suppressor/indicator light
Directional Control
4 15A
5 20A ∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
Equipment
6 25A
7 32A Electrical entry
8 40A G –– Grommet
9 50A C –– Conduit
D –– DIN terminal
T –– Conduit terminal
Type of actuation/Body type ∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
0 ––– Normally closed/Single
Rated voltage
Solenoid valve option 1 –– 100VAC, 50/60Hz
Nil ––– Standard specification 2 –– 200VAC, 50/60Hz
3 –– 110VAC, 50/60Hz
Connection 4 –– 220VAC, 50/60Hz
02 ––– 1/4 5 –– 24VDC
03 ––– 3/8 Thread type 6 –– 12VDC
Thread 04 ––– 1/2 Nil –– Rc 7 –– 240VAC, 50/60Hz
06 ––– 3/4 T ––– NPTF 8 –– 48VAC, 50/60Hz
10 ––– 1 F ––– G 9 –– Other (Consult with SMC)
N ––– NPT ∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
32 ––– For 32A
Flange 40 ––– For 40A
50 ––– For 50A
49
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 50
VXD21
VXD22 2
VXD23 Bracket
Nil ––– None
B –––– With bracket
Thread connection for 03 to
10 is possible.
Electrical option
Nil –– None
S ––– With surge voltage suppressor
Body size L ––– With indicator light
4 ––– 15A Z ––– With surge voltage suppressor/
5 ––– 20A indicator light
6 ––– 25A
∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
7 ––– 32A
8 ––– 40A
9 ––– 50A Electrical entry
G ––– Grommet
C ––– Conduit
D ––– DIN terminal
Type of actuation/Body type
T ––– Conduit terminal
2 –– Normally open/Single
∗ Refer to “Table 2” below for applicability.
50
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 51
VC A 2 1 1 G 3 02
For air
Option
Series
Nil None
2 Class 2
F Foot type bracket
3 Class 3
∗ When only brackets are required,
4 Class 4 refer to “Table 2” below.
Type of actuation
Thread type (single type)
Directional Control
N.C.
Nil Rc
OUT(2)
Equipment
F G
1 N NPT
T NPTF
IN(1)
Port size
Fluid Symbol Port size Class 2 Class 3 Class 4
Nil General air 02 1/4 (8 A) —
A Dry air 03 3/8 (10 A) —
04 1/2 (15 A) — —
06 3/4 (20 A) — —
Voltage
1 100 VAC
2 200 VAC Orifice size
3 110 VAC Symbol Orifice size (mmø) Class 2 Class 3 Class 4
4 220 VAC 3 3 — —
5 24 VDC 4 4 — —
6 12 VDC 5 5 —
∗ Consult with SMC 7 7 —
regarding other 10 10 — —
voltages. ∗ Refer to the table below for orifice and port size combinations.
51
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 52
Series VCA
Standard Specifications
Valve specifications
Body material Al
Seal material HNBR
Ambient temperature (°C) –20 to 60
Fluid temperature (°C) –10 to 60 (with no freezing)
Enclosure Dust proof, Splash proof (equivalent to IP65)
Environment Location without corrosive or explosive gases
Valve leakage cm3/ min (ANR) 0.2 or less
Mounting orientation Free
Vibration/Impact resistance (m/s2) Note 2) 30/150 or less
Rated voltage 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 100 VAC, 110 VAC, 200 VAC, 220 VAC (50/60 Hz)
specifications
Characteristic Specifications
Maximum Note)
Orifice Effective area Max. operating
operating Weight
Model Class Port size size mm2 pressure
pressure kg
ø mm (Cv factor) MPa
differential MPa
3 1.0 6 (0.33)
2 1/4 (8A) 1.0 0.21
5 0.15 15 (0.83)
VCA 1/4 (8A) 4 1.0 10 (0.55)
(for air) 3 1.0 0.30
3/8 (10A) 7 0.15 27 (1.5)
2 port
solenoid 5 1.0 15 (0.83)
valve 3/8 (10A)
4 1/2 (15A) 7 0.3 27 (1.5) 1.0 0.50
3/4 (20A)
10 0.15 38 (2.11)
Note) Weight values are for the grommet type.
52
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 53
VQ 2 1 A 1 1 G C6
Series/Orifice size Option
Symbol Series Effective orifice Nil: None
2 VQ20 ø3.4 mm
3 VQ30 ø4.8 mm
F: With bracket
Type of actuation
N.C. (A)
2 L: L type
1 (VQ20 only)
Directional Control
1
(P)
Equipment
Note) Consult with SMC Note) Specify “LF” for L type with
for N.O. type. bracket.
Manual override
Nil None
M: For manifold Slotted locking type
B Note) (Tool type)
Note) Available only for normally
closed DIN terminal in-line type.
G: Grommet
Y: DIN terminal
53
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 54
Series VQ20/30
Standard Specifications
Rated coil voltage 12 VDC, 24 VDC, 100 VAC, 110 VAC, 200 VAC
Allowable voltage fluctuation ±10% of rated voltage
VQ30
Coil insulation Equivalent to class B
24 VDC 2.5 W DC (104 mA)
Power consumption 2.5 W DC (208 mA)
12 VDC
(current value)
100 VAC Inrush: 2 VA (20 mA), Energized: 2 VA (20 mA)
Symbol
Electrical entry Grommet, DIN terminal
(A) Note 1) Based on JISB8375-1981 (Values for supply pressure of 0.5 MPa, without indicator light/surge
2 voltage suppressor)
Note 2) Use dry air without condensation when operating at low temperatures.
Note 3) Manual override is available for DIN terminal type only.
1 Note 4) Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one sweep test between 8.3 and 2000 Hz.
(P) Test was performed in the axial and right angle directions of the main
N.C. valve and armature for both energized and de-energized states. (The
value is for the initial stage.)
Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact
tester. The test was performed one time each in the axial and right angle
directions of the main valve and armature for both energized and de-
energized states. (The value is for the initial stage.)
Note 5) DIN terminal type is dust and splash proof (IP65) compatible.
54
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 55
Series VXZ
2 Port Solenoid Valve Cooling Water
For air, gas, vacuum, water, oil
Models/Valve specifications
Normally Closed (N.C.) Min. operating Max. operating pressure differential (MPa) Max.
Flow coefficient
Port Orifice Effective pressure system Weight∗
Model differential Water Air Oil pressure
size (ømm) Cv area (g)
(mm2) (MPa) AC DC AC DC AC DC (MPa)
14 10 1.9 34 VXZ2230-02 1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7 550
1.5
12 15 5.3 95 VXZ2240-04 0 1.0 0.7 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7 760
34 20 9.2 165 VXZ2350-06 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.7 1,300
∗ Weight for grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, and 60 g for terminal type.
Directional Control
Power Frequency Apparent power (VA) Power consumption Temperature increase (°C)
Model
Equipment
OUT supply (Hz) Inrush Energized (W) (energized) (rated voltage)
50 60(53) 18 7.5 60
AC
VXZ22 60 51(44) 12 6 50
IN DC — — — 8 60
50 80 21 11 65
AC
VXZ23 60 67 17 9.5 60
DC — — — 11.5 65
Note 1) Reset voltage is 20% or more of rated voltage for AC, and 2% or more of rated voltage for DC.
Note 2) Allowable voltage fluctuation is ±10% of rated value for both AC and DC.
Note 3) The values are for ambient temperature of 20°C ±5°C and rated voltage.
Note 4) AC to DC or DC to AC coil exchange is not possible due to different armature
configuration.
Note 5) Values for apparent power inside ( ) are for VXZ2230.
Models/Valve specifications
Normally Open (N.O.) Min. operating Max. operating pressure differential (MPa) Max.
Flow coefficient
Port Orifice Effective pressure system Weight∗
Model differential Water Air Oil pressure
size (ømm) Cv area (g)
(mm2) (MPa) AC DC AC DC AC DC (MPa)
14 10 1.9 34 VXZ2232-02 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 600
1.5
12 15 5.3 95 VXZ2242-04 0 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 850
34 20 9.2 165 VXZ2352-06 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.6 1,370
∗ Weight for grommet type. Add 10 g for conduit type, 30 g for DIN terminal type, and 60 g for terminal type.
55
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 56
How to Order
Normally
N.C. Closed VXZ 2230 02 1 G
Normally
N.O. Open VXZ 2232 02 1 G
Bracket
Nil None
Electrical entry B With bracket
Table 1
Fluid Rated voltage/Electrical entry/Electrical options
Standard specifications Option Note) Insulation Class B Class H
Air (general, dry) Air (dry) (T) classification
Vacuum (up to 1 Torr) High temperature water (D, E) Electrical G C D, T
entry G, C T
Turbine oil, Carbon dioxide (CO2), Argon, Helium (F)
Note)
Gaseous nitrogen (N2) Electrical
option S — S L, Z — S L, Z
Freon 11, 113, 114 (Other)
1 (100 V)
2 (200 V)
Fluid and ambient temperature 3 (110 V)
AC
4 (220 V)
Fluid temperature (°C) Ambient
Temperature Power Note 3) Note 3) 7 (240 V) — —
Water Air Oil High temp. High temp. temperature
condition supply water 8 (48 V) — — —
(standard) (standard) (standard) oil (D.N.) (°C)
(D.E.N.P.) 5 (24 V) — — —
DC
AC 60 80 60 99 100 60 6 (12 V) — — — —
Maximum
DC 40 60 40 — — 40 Note) Surge voltage suppressor is attached
Minimum AC·DC 1 –10 Note 2) –5 Note 3) — — –10 to the lead wire.
Note 1) Dew point is –10°C or below.
Note 2) 50 cSt or less
Note 3) D.E.N.P., etc., inside ( ) indicate option codes.
56
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 57
For air, gas, vacuum, water, oil Series VXA21/22 Air Purge
Models/Valve specifications
Normally Closed (N.C.)/Normally Open (N.O.)
Port Flow coefficient Max. operating Max. system Proof
Orifice Effective
Weight
size Model pressure pressure pressure
(ømm) Cv area differential (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (g)
N.C. (Rc) (mm )
2
Directional Control
Symbols
Pilot pressure
Equipment
N.C. N.O.
OUT OUT Model Pressure (MPa)
VXA21
0.25 to 0.7
VXA22
IN IN
How to Order
VXA21
VXA22
Bracket
Nil –– None
B ––– With bracket
∗ Refer to “Table 2” below when only
brackets are required.
Thread type
Orifice size
Nil –– Rc
2 –– ø3mm
T ––– NPTF
3 –– ø4.5mm
F ––– G
4 –– ø6mm
N ––– NPT
5 –– ø8mm
6 –– ø10mm
∗ Refer to “Table 1” below for applicability. Port size
01 –– 1/8
02 –– 1/4
Type of actuation/Body type 03 –– 3/8
0 –– Normally closed (N.C.)/Single 04 –– 1/2
2 –– Normally open (N.O.)/Single
∗ Refer to “Table 1” below for applicability.
Valve option
Nil –– Standard specification
V –– Vacuum, non-leak
57
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 58
58
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 59
Rubber Seal
Pilot Operated Poppet Type 3 Port Solenoid Valve Series VP300/500/700
How to Order
VP 3 4 2 1 E B 01 A
Option
VP solenoid F With bracket
valve (For VP342, 542, 742 only)
Directional Control
02 14
Equipment
03 38
Body type 12
04
2 Body ported
∗ For VP344, VP544, VP744 only
4 Base mounted
Manual override
Valve option Nil Push type
Nil Standard (Internal pilot type) B∗ Slotted locking type
R∗ External pilot type C∗ Locking type
∗ Optional ∗ Optional
Indicator light/Surge voltage suppressor
Rated voltage Nil None
With indicator light/surge voltage
1 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz Z∗
2 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz suppressor (for “E”, “T”, “D” only)
3∗ 110 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz S∗ With surge voltage suppressor (for “G” only)
4∗ 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz ∗ Optional
5 24 VDC
6∗ 12 VDC Electrical entry
7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
G Grommet
9∗ Other
E Grommet terminal
∗ Optional
T Conduit terminal
D DIN terminal
SF4 1 E Z B 50
Approx. 300
Approx. 300
G GS
Rated voltage Manual override
1 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz Nil Push type
2 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz B∗ Slotted locking type
3∗ 110 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz C∗ Locking type Surge voltage suppressor
5 24 VDC E EZ
Indicator light/Surge voltage suppressor
6∗ 12 VDC
7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Nil None
9∗ Other Z∗
With indicator light/surge voltage
suppressor (for “E”, “T”, “D” only) Surge voltage suppressor
∗ Optional
S∗ With surge voltage suppressor (for “G” only) Indicator light
Electrical entry ∗ Optional T TZ
G Grommet
E Grommet terminal
T Conduit terminal
Surge voltage suppressor
D DIN terminal
Indicator light
D DZ
59
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 60
Series VG342
3 Port Solenoid Valve Air Purge
Option specification
External pilot Low power consumption type: VG342–––Y
Consider this specification when an electronic control, etc., requires low power consumption.
60
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 61
Rubber Seal
Pilot Operated Poppet Type 3 Port Solenoid Valve Series VG342
Caution
How to Order Indicator Light/
Surge Voltage Suppressor
VG342 1 G 04 A 100 VAC/DC or more
For indicator light assembly
Terminal No. 1 (+)
Valve type Pilot valve option
Nil Internal pilot Nil Standard
R External pilot Y∗ Low power consumption
E∗ Continuous energization
Rated voltage ∗ Optional
Terminal No. 2 (–)
1 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz Flow passage
2 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz Nil External pilot 48 VDC or less
3∗
For indicator light assembly
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz A N.C. (Normally closed) Terminal No. 1 (+)
4∗ 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz B N.O. (Normally open)
5 24 VDC (+)
6∗ 12 VDC Thread type (–)
7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Nil Rc
9∗ Other
F∗
Directional Control
G
∗ Optional
N∗ NPT
Terminal No. 2 (–)
T∗
Equipment
NPTF
Electrical entry ∗ Optional Electrical Connection
G Grommet The internal connections for DlN terminal and
Port size terminal (with indicator light/surge voltage
D DIN terminal
04 Rc 1 2 suppressor circuit) are as shown below.
E Grommet terminal
06 Rc 3 4 Connect each to the power supply side.
T Conduit terminal
10 Rc 1
With DlN terminal block With terminal block
Indicator light/Surge voltage suppressor
Nil None
With surge voltage suppressor
S
(For grommet type only)
With indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
Z Ground
(Except grommet type)
Terminal no. 1 2
DlN terminal + –
How to Order Pilot Valve Assemblies Terminal + –
61
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 62
Solenoid specifications
Grommet (G), Conduit terminal (T),
Standard
DIN terminal (D)
Conduit terminal with indicator light (TL),
Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor (TS),
Electrical entry Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor (TZ),
<For vacuum> Options
DlN terminal with indicator light (DL),
DlN terminal with surge voltage suppressor (DS),
DlN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor (DZ)
AC (50/60 Hz) 100 V, 200 V, 110 V ∗, 220 V ∗, 240 V ∗ Note 1)
Rated coil voltage
DC 12 V ∗, 24 V, 48 V ∗, 100 V ∗ Note 1)
Allowable voltage fluctuation –15% to +10% of rated voltage
Note 2)
Inrush 73 VA (50 Hz), 58 VA (60 Hz)
Apparent power AC
Energized 28 VA (50 Hz), 17 VA (60 Hz)
Power consumption Note 2) DC 12 W
Note) In the case of the N.O. specification, it Note 1) Values indicated by an asterisk (∗) are optional.
operates as a normally open valve only Note 2) At rated voltage
when the proper pressure is applied to
the pilot chamber.
62
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 63
Rubber Seal
Large 3 Port Solenoid Valve Series VP3145/3165/3185
Directional Control
Vacuum/ Valve option surge voltage suppressor
Conduit terminal with indicator light/
TZ∗
Low pressure General purpose
Equipment
Nil General surge voltage suppressor
V Vacuum/Low pressure DL∗ DIN terminal with indicator light
DIN terminal with
DS∗ surge voltage suppressor
Port size (IN/OUT port)
DZ∗
DIN terminal with indicator light/
Pilot pressure (MPa)
VT3113 00 1 G
Rated coil voltage Electrical entry
11 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz Grommet
22 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz Conduit terminal
3∗ 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz DIN terminal
4∗ 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz TL∗ Conduit terminal with indicator light
55 24 VDC TS∗ Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor
6∗ Conduit terminal with indicator light/
12 VDC TZ∗
7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
surge voltage suppressor
9∗ Other DL∗ DIN terminal with indicator light
∗ Optional DS∗ DIN terminal with surge voltage suppressor
DZ∗ DIN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
∗ Optional
63
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 64
Option specifications
Total travel (T.T.) 2.5 mm (Basic type)
• A commercially available actuator for the V micro switch can be installed.
• However, be aware that there are different types of micro switch such as P.T., O.T. or F.O.F.
• Total travel of 2.5 mm is only available for the basic type.
Models
No. of Applicable tube
Actuator Port type ports Note
T0425 TU0425/T0403
Mechanical operation
64
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 65
Models
Piping Side ported Bottom ported Actuator
No. o Application
f port part no.
Actuator s 3 port 3 port
VM130-01-00 VM132-M5-00
Basic type —
VM131-01-00 VM133-M5-00
Mechanical operation
Directional Control
One way VM131-01-02 VM133-M5-02 — Polyacetal roller
roller lever VM131-01-02S VM133-M5-02S — Hard steel roller
Equipment
Straight plunger VM130-01-05 VM132-M5-05 VM-05B —
VM130-01-06 VM132-M5-06 VM-06B Polyacetal roller
Roller plunger
VM130-01-06S VM132-M5-06S VM-06BS Hard steel roller
VM130-01-07 VM132-M5-07 VM-07B Polyacetal roller
Cross roller plunger
VM130-01-07S VM132-M5-07S VM-07BS Hard steel roller
Toggle lever VM130-01-08 VM132-M5-08 VM-08B
VM130-01-30R VM132-M5-30R VM-30AR Red
Push button VM130-01-30B VM132-M5-30B VM-30AB Black
(Mushroom) VM130-01-30G VM132-M5-30G VM-30AG Green
VM130-01-30Y VM132-M5-30Y VM-30AY Yellow
VM130-01-32R VM132-M5-32R VM-32AR Red
Push button VM130-01-32B VM132-M5-32B VM-32AB Black
(Extended) VM130-01-32G VM132-M5-32G VM-32AG Green
VM130-01-32Y VM132-M5-32Y VM-32AY Yellow
Manual operation
65
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 66
Models
No. of ports Actuator
3 port part no. Application
Actuator
Basic type VM230-02-00 — —
VM230-02-01 VM-01A Polyacetal roller
Mechanical operation
Roller lever
VM230-02-01S VM-01AS Hard steel roller
VM230-02-02 VM-02A Polyacetal roller
One way roller lever
VM230-02-02S VM-02AS Hard steel roller
Straight plunger VM230-02-05 VM-05A —
VM230-02-06 VM-06A Polyacetal roller
Roller plunger
VM230-02-06S VM-06AS Hard steel roller
VM230-02-07 VM-07A Polyacetal roller
Cross roller plunger
VM230-02-07S VM-07AS Hard steel roller
Toggle lever VM230-02-08 VM-08A —
VM230-02-30R VM-30AR Red
VM230-02-30B VM-30AB Black
Push button (Mushroom)
VM230-02-30G VM-30AG Green
VM230-02-30Y VM-30AY Yellow
VM230-02-32R VM-32AR Red
VM230-02-32B VM-32AB Black
Push button (Extended)
VM230-02-32G VM-32AG Green
VM230-02-32Y VM-32AY Yellow
A set of Red, Black,
Manual operation
66
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 67
Models
Actuator
Actuator Model part no. Application
Basic type VM430-01-00 — —
VM430-01-01 VM-01A Polyacetal roller
Mechanical operation
Roller lever
VM430-01-01S VM-01AS Hard steel roller
VM430-01-02 VM-02A Polyacetal roller
One way roller lever
VM430-01-02S VM-02AS Hard steel roller
Directional Control
Straight plunger VM430-01-05 VM-05A —
VM430-01-06 VM-06A Polyacetal roller
Equipment
Roller plunger
VM430-01-06S VM-06AS Hard steel roller
VM430-01-07 VM-07A Polyacetal roller
Cross roller plunger
VM430-01-07S VM-07AS Hard steel roller
Toggle lever VM430-01-08 VM-08A —
VM430-01-30R VM-30AR Red
VM430-01-30B VM-30AB Black
Push button (Mushroom)
VM430-01-30G VM-30AG Green
VM430-01-30Y VM-30AY Yellow
VM430-01-32R VM-32AR Red
VM430-01-32B VM-32AB Black
Manual operation
67
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 68
Coolant Valve
Series VNC
Solenoid/Air Operated Type Coolant
Models
Piping port Flow coefficient Weight (kg)
Note) Orifice
Model
Rc Flange (ømm) Effective area Air operated Solenoid
Cv type type
(mm2)
VNC1 4 -6A 18 — 0.7 13
VNC1 4 -8A 14 — 7 1 18 0.2 0.3
VNC1 4 -10A 1.3 23
VNC2 4 -10A 38 — 11 2.5 45
VNC2 4 -10A 15 3.8 70
0.5 0.7
VNC2 4 -15A 12 11 3 55
—
VNC2 4 -15A 15 5 90
VNC3 4 -20A 34 14 5 90
— 0.8 1.0
VNC3 4 -20A 20 8 140
VNC4 4 -25A 16 7 130
1 — 1.2 1.4
VNC4 4 -25A 25 12 220
VNC5 4 -32A 22 11 210
11 4 — 2.2 2.4
VNC5 4 -32A 32 18 320
VNC5 4 -32F 22 11 210
— 32 5.0 5.2
VNC5 4 -32F 32 18 320
VNC6 4 -40A 28 19 330
11 2 — 3.6 3.8
VNC6 4 -40A 40 28 500
VNC6 4 -40F 28 19 330
— 40 6.8 7.0
VNC6 4 -40F 40 28 500
Symbols VNC7 4 -50A 33 29 520
2 — 5.5 5.7
Valve type VNC7 4 -50A 50 43 770
N.C. N.O.
Operation VNC7 4 -50F 33 29 520
— 50 10.2 10.4
VNC 04
1
VNC 02 VNC7 4 -50F 50 43 770
VNC814 -65F 45 49 880
P1 P2 — 65 — 15.7
VNC811 -65F 65 70 1260
Air operated VNC914 -80F 56 73 1400
— 80 — 21.2
VNC911 -80F 80 100 1800
Note) The flange is equivalent to JIS B 2210 10K (regular type).
Valve specifications
Fluid Coolant Pilot solenoid valve specifications
VNC A –5 to 60°C∗ Model VNC1 VNC2 to 9
Fluid
temperature VNC –5 to 99°C∗ Pilot solenoid valve SF4--23 VO301-00T-X302
B
(air operated type only) Grommet
Ambient temperature –5 to 50°C∗ (60°C for air operated type) Electrical entry
Grommet terminal Conduit terminal
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Conduit terminal
DIN terminal
Operating VNC 1 0 to 0.5 MPa
pressure range VNC 2
0 to 1 MPa AC
4
Rated coil 100 V, 200 V, other (option)
1 (50/60 Hz)
Pressure VNC 4 0.25 to 0.7 MPa voltage V
DC 24 V, other (option)
VNC 2 0.1 to 0.7 MPa (Refer to Table 1.)
External Allowable pressure fluctuation –15% to +10% of rated voltage
pilot air Lubrication Not required (If lubricated,
use turbine oil class 1, ISO VG32.) Coil insulation type Equivalent to class B (130°C)
Temperature –5 to 50°C∗ (60°C for air operated type) Temperature increase
35°C or less 70°C or less
(at rated voltage) (at rated voltage)
∗ With no freezing
5.6 VA (50 Hz) 12 VA (50 Hz)
Inrush
Apparent 5.0 VA (60 Hz) 10.5 VA (60 Hz)
AC
Table 1 power 3.4 VA (50 Hz) 7.5 VA (50 Hz)
Operating pressure/Pilot Pressure Energized
2.3 VA (60 Hz) 6 VA (60 Hz)
Power
DC 1.8 W 4.8 W
consumption
Use pilot pressure that
Pilot pressure (MPa)
is within range A with Manual override Push type, other (option) Non-locking push type
respect to the operating
pressure.
68
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 69
Coolant Valve
Solenoid/Air Operated Type Series VNC
How to Order
External Pilot
Solenoid Type VNC 2 1 1 A 15A 1 T
Manual override
Directional Control
Nil: Push type
Equipment
Valve size Valve type Port size Rated voltage A: Projecting style
push type
Symbol Nil Air operated type
Orifice Port Valve
1 2 4 1 100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Symbol size Symbol size size
(mm) N.C. N.O. N.C. (Rc) 2 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1
3∗
0.5 MPa 1 MPa 1 MPa B: Slotted
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
locking
6A 1/8 4∗ 220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1 ø7 type
8A 1/4 5 24 VDC
10A 3/8 6∗ 12 VDC
2 ø15 (ø11)
10A 3/8 7∗ 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
15A 1/2 9∗ Other Nil: Push type
3 ø20 (ø14) 20A 3/4 ∗ Optional
4 ø25 (ø16) 25A 1 Valve
32A 1 1/4 sizes
5 ø32 (ø22) 1 1/4B 2 to 9
32F Flange
40A 1 1/2
6 ø40 (ø28) 1 1/2B
40F Flange Electrical entry and indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
50A 2 Nil Air operated type
7 ø50 (ø33) 2B G Grommet
50F Flange
GS Grommet with surge voltage suppressor
2 1/2B E Grommet terminal
8 ø65 (ø45) 65F Flange Valve
EZ Grommet terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
size
2B T Conduit terminal
9 ø80 (ø56) 80F Flange 1
TZ Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
Values inside ( ) are for N.C. at 1 MPa. D DIN terminal
DZ DIN terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
T Conduit terminal
Conduit terminal with surge voltage suppressor Valve
TS
sizes
TZ∗ Conduit terminal with indicator light/surge voltage suppressor
2 to 9
TL∗ Conduit terminal with indicator light
69
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 70
VKFA332-1-01-X1
PA
25
18
11.5 17.5
5
100
28.5
A
21
2.3
P 11
Specifications
Valve type Poppet
Fluid Air, Inert gas
Operating pressure range 0 to 0.7 MPa
Pilot pressure 0.15 to 0.7 MPa
OFF 4 mm2 (Cv factor: 0.22)
Effective area Adjustable type: 0 to 4 mm2
ON (at 5/6 rotation from fully closed state)
70
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 71
Booster Valve
Series VBA1110 to 4200 Hydraulic Clamp
Specifications Models
VBA1110 Handle operated type Air operated type
Intensified VBA2 00 Maximum 2 Model
VBA1110-02 VBA1111-02 VBA2100-03 VBA4100-04 VBA2200-03 VBA4200-04
pressure ratio VBA4 00
Max. flow rate l/min (ANR) Note) 400 60 1000 1900 1000 1900
VBA1111 Maximum 4
Port size Rc 1/4 (IN, OUT) 3/8 (IN, OUT) 1/2 (IN, OUT) 3/8 (IN, OUT) 1/2 (IN, OUT)
Fluid Compressed air
Exhaust port size Rc 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2
VBA1110
3.0 MPa Pilot port size Rc
VBA1111 1/8
Proof pressure
VBA2 00 Pilot pressure range 0.1 to 0.5 MPa
1.5 MPa
VBA4 00
Weight kg 0.85 0.98 3.8 7.5 3.8 7.5
Maximum supply pressure 1.0 MPa Note) Flow conditions — IN/OUT: 1.0MPa for VBA1110, IN/OUT: 0.5MPa for VBA1111, VBA22100, 42100
VBA1110 Refer to flow characteristics graphs on page 14-9-3 of “Best Pneumatics Vol. 14” when selecting a model.
0.2 to 2.0 MPa
Set pressure VBA1111
range VBA2 00 Accessory (option) part nos.
0.2 to 1.0 MPa
VBA4 00 Part no.
Ambient and fluid temperature 2 to 50°C (with no freezing) Model
Description VBA1110-1111 VBA2100 VBA4100 VBA2200 VBA4200
Lubrication None Pressure gauge G27-20-R1 … 2 pcs. G27-10-R1-X209 … 2 pcs. G46-10-01 … 2 pcs. G27-10-R1-X209 … 2 pcs. G46-10-01 … 2 pcs.
Mounting orientation Horizontal
Silencer AN200-02 AN300-03 AN400-04 AN300-03 AN400-04
Directional Control
Pressure adjustment mechanism Relieving type
Equipment
How to Order
Pressure Intensified pressure ratio
1 2.0 MPa 0 Double
Pressure adjustment 1 Quadruple
1 Handle operated type
VBA1110-02 Port size
Body size Symbol Port size
VBA1111-02 1 1/4 standard 02 Rc 1/4
71
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 72
72
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 73
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Tube cutter TK Air leakage 107
Regulator 108
Equipment
AR10 to 60 Air blow, Air tool
Pilot operated regulator AR425 to 935 Air blow, Air tool 109
Regulator with back flow mechanism AR20K to 60K Actuator 110
Filter regulator AW10 to 40 Air blow, Air tool 111
Filter regulator with back flow mechanism AW20K to 40K Actuator 113
Air filter element part number list Air line maintenance 114
Differential pressure gauge GD40-01 Air line maintenance 115
Filter with element service indicator Air line maintenance 116
73
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 74
Blow Gun
Series VMG Air Blow
Top piping
Bottom piping
With S coupler plug
30 100 mm
25 Male thread
nozzle
20
High efficiency nozzle 15
10
5
Scale: Accuracy
0
0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 Measurement value ±0.2% or less
Temperature: 20°C
Internal pressure (MPa)
Distance between a sample and the scale: 100 mm
Conventional product
Operational force
0.04
0.03
0.005 MPa pressure loss at 0.5 MPa
Blow Gun 0.02
Small
0.01
0
0 1.0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
Supply pressure (MPa) Supply pressure (MPa)
74
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 75
Example of Improvement
Before Improvement
In the case of air guns, energy saving measures are not considered.
S1
S2
Effective area ratio
Pressure loss: Large
2.3 : 1
ø3
Without nozzle
ø3
Pressure Loss of Air Gun Only
Effective area Upstream side S1: 15
(mm2) Nozzle side S2: 6.4
Effective area ratio S1 : S2 = 2.3 : 1
Nozzle size (mm) ø3
Number of nozzles 1
Supply pressure 0.700 MPa
Regulator pressure 0.300 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.260 MPa
Pressure loss 0.040 MPa
After Improvement
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Change to fittings, tubing and Blow Gun with large effective areas.
Equipment
S1
S2
Filter Effective area ratio
regulator Coil Pressure loss: Small
tube 10.7 : 1
S coupler
Nozzle
ø2 ø2
Before After
75
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 76
Series VMG
How to Order
VMG 1 1 W 03 01
Specifications
Fluid Air
Operating pressure range 0 to 1.0 MPa
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60°C (With no condensation)
Effective area 30 mm2 (without nozzle)
Port size Rc, NPT, G, 1/4, 3/8
Piping entry Bottom Top
Nozzle port size Rc 1/4
Weight 180 g
Operational force (when the valve is fully open) 7N
76
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 77
Construction
!2 qw !8 e !3 r u i Component Parts
No. Description Material Note
o 1 Body L PBT
2 Body R PBT
t 3 Main valve PBT
4 Valve guide Aluminium alloy Chromated
5 Nozzle holder Aluminium alloy Anodized
6 Port Aluminium alloy Anodized
7 Elbow PBT
8 Cover Stainless steel
9 Ring Stainless steel
10 Arm L Stainless steel
!4 11 Arm R Stainless steel
!6 12 Spring Stainless steel
!1 !0 13 Main valve seal HNBR
!7 14 Guide cover Stainless steel
!9 15 Lever PBT
y 16 Tube PBT ∗ Only for VMG11
17 O-ring NBR
@1 @0 18 NBR
O-ring
19 Parallel pin Stainless steel
!5 20 Round head Phillips screw Stainless steel
21 Hexagon nut Stainless steel
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Flow Characteristics Note) Values when the main valve is fully open.
Equipment
Male thread nozzle High efficiency nozzle
600 400
KN-R02-250 KNH-R02-200
350
500
Flow rate [l/min (ANR)]
300
400
KN-R02-200 250
KNH-R02-150
300 200
KN-R02-150 150
200
100 KNH-R02-100
100
KN-R02-100
50
0 0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
700
300
600
KNS-R02-090-8 250
500 KNL3-06-150
200 KNL6-06-150
400
KNS-R02-100-4 150
300
200 100
KNS-R02-075-4
100 50
0 0
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
77
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 78
Series VMG
Dimensions
Rc 1/4
Nozzle
156
23
Note 1)
Width across flats22
34.2
30 102
A 117.5
Rc, NPT, G 1/4, 3/8
S coupler plug mounting
Rc 1/4
Nozzle
23
30 102
A 117.5
(mm) (mm)
Type Nozzle model Nozzle size A Note 1) Type Nozzle model Nozzle size A Note 1)
KN-R02-100 ø1 23.4 KNS-R02-075-4 ø0.75 x 4 12
Male thread nozzle
KN-R02-150 ø1.5 23 Low noise nozzle KNS-R02-090-8 ø0.9 x 8 12
KN-R02-200 ø2 22.5 with male thread KNS-R02-100-4 ø1 x 4 12
KN-R02-250 ø2.5 22.1 KNS-R02-110-8 ø1.1 x 8 12
KNH-R02-100 ø1 44
Copper extension nozzle
KNL3-06-150 ø1.5 305.3
High efficiency nozzle KNH-R02-150 ø1.5 44
(with self-align fitting
KNL3-06-200 ø2 305.3
KNH-R02-200 ø2 44
H06-02)
KNL6-06-150 ø1.5 605.3
KNL6-06-200 ø2 605.3
Note 1) Reference dimensions after installation
78
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 79
Dimensions: Nozzle/Series KN
øD
H1
A
L1
øD
KNH-R02-200 ø2 R 1/4 14 52 46 H1
A
The air blow thrust is L1
improved by 10%.
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Low noise nozzle with male thread: KNS (mm)
Nozzle size Connection Width across flats
Model
D thread H1 L1 A
KNS-R02-075-4 ø0.75 x 4 R 1/4 14 20 14
øD
KNS-R02-090-8 ø0.9 x 8 R 1/4 14 20 14
KNS-R02-100-4 ø1 x 4 R 1/4 14 20 14 2
Connection
KNS-R02-110-8 ø1.1 x 8 R 1/4 14 20 14 H1 A thread
L1
D
KNL3-06-150 ø1.5 ø6 300
KNL3-06-200 ø2 ø6 300
KNL6-06-150 ø1.5 ø6 600
øD
KNL6-06-200 ø2 ø6 600
Note) When a copper extension nozzle is ordered separately, a self-align fitting will also be
L1
required for connection with the blow gun. Order one with the following part number in
addition to the nozzle.
Half union
H06-02
79
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 80
Air Blow
Series KN Coolant
øD
KN-06-100 ø1 ø6 12 12 30.1 16
H1 H2
KN-06-150 ø1.5 ø6 12 12 30.8 16 L2
KN-06-200 ø2 ø6 12 12 31.5 16
L1
KN-08-150 ø1.5 ø8 14 14 33.8 16
KN-08-200 ø2 ø8 14 14 34.6 16
KN-10-250 ø2.5 ø10 14 17 35.6 17
KN-10-300 ø3 ø10 14 17 36.3 17
KN-10-350 ø3.5 ø10 14 17 37.1 17
KN-10-400 ø4 ø10 14 17 29.5 17
KN-10-600 ø6 ø10 14 17 27.7 17
KN-12-350 ø3.5 ø12 17 19 40.4 17
KN-12-400 ø4 ø12 17 19 41.3 17
KN-12-600 ø6 ø12 17 19 31.2 17
KN-16-400 ø4 ø16 22 24 40.1 17
KN-16-600 ø6 ø16 22 24 38.4 17
KN-20-400 ø4 ø20 26 27 45.6 17
KN-20-600 ø6 ø20 26 27 43.9 17
øD
KN-R02-200 ø2 R1/4 14 30.5 24.5
KN-R02-250 ø2.5 R1/4 14 30.1 24.1 H1
A
KN-R02-600 ø6 R1/4 14 27.1 21.1
KN-R03-400 ø4 R3/8 17 31.8 25.4 L1
KN-R03-600 ø6 R3/8 17 30.1 23.7
KN-R04-400 ø4 R1/2 22 41.8 33.6
KN-R04-600 ø6 R1/2 22 40.1 31.8
KN-R06-600 ø6 R3/4 27 49.6 40.1
KN-R06-800 ø8 R3/4 27 47.8 38
KN-R10-800 ø8 R1 36 62.8 52.4
80
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 81
øD
KN-Q06-150 ø1.5 ø6 35 18 10
KN-Q06-200 ø2 ø6 35 18 A
KN-Q08-150 ø1.5 ø8 39 20.5
L1
KN-Q08-200 ø2 ø8 39 20.5
Note) Not applicable to the KN-Q10-200 ø2 ø10 43 22
connection threads KN-Q10-250 ø2.5 ø10 43 22
(M5, M6) of the KJ KN-Q12-250 ø2.5 ø12 45.5 24
and the KQ series. KN-Q12-300 ø3 ø12 45.5 24
35°
øD
KNK-10-600 ø6 ø10 17 17 41.7 17
KNK-12-400 ø4 ø12 17 19 41.2 17 H2
KNK-12-600 ø6 ø12 17 19 41.2 17 8.5 L2
KNK-16-400 ø4 ø16 17 24 41.8 17 L1
KNK-16-600 ø6 ø16 17 24 41.8 17
KNK-20-400 ø4 ø20 17 27 43.8 17
KNK-20-600 ø6 ø20 17 27 43.8 17
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Model D size L1 A Connection thread
H1 H2
Equipment
KNK-R02-400 ø4 R1/4 17 17 38 31.9
KNK-R02-600 ø6 R1/4 17 17 38 31.9
35°
øD
KNK-R03-400 ø4 R3/8 17 17 39 32.4
KNK-R03-600 ø6 R3/8 17 17 39 32.4
KNK-R04-400 ø4 R1/2 17 22 42.2 34.1 H2
H1
KNK-R04-600 ø6 R1/2 17 22 42.2 34.1 8.5
A
L1
H1 H2
KNS-08-075-4 ø0.75 x 4 ø8 12 14 24.3 16
KNS-08-100-4 ø1 x 4 ø8 12 14 24.3 16
KNS-10-075-4 ø0.75 x 4 ø10 14 17 24 17
H1 H2
KNS-10-090-8 ø0.9 x 8 ø10 14 17 24 17 2
KNS-10-100-4 ø1 x 4 ø10 14 17 24 17 L1
KNS-R01-100-4 ø1 x 4 R1/8 12 18 14
KNS-R01-090-8 ø0.9 x 8 R1/8 12 18 14 2
KNS-R02-075-4 ø0.75 x 4 R1/4 14 20 14 H1 A
KNS-R02-090-8 ø0.9 x 8 R1/4 14 20 14 L1
KNS-R02-100-4 ø1 x 4 R1/4 14 20 14
KNS-R02-110-8 ø1.1 x 8 R1/4 14 20 14 Connection thread
81
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:27 AM Page 82
Series KN
Sensing Heads
Standard sensing head (mm)
Nozzle size Connection Width across flats
Model L1 L2 L1 L2
D size H1 H2
øD
KNP-1 ø2.5 ø4 5 8 63.7 1000
∗ A 1 m polyurethane tube is included.
H1 H2
Polyurethane tubing
øD
KNP-2 ø0.7 ø4 5 12.7 41 1000 23
∗ A 1 m polyurethane tube is included.
Cassette size
L3
L1
Polyurethane tubing
Specifications
Nozzle (KN, KNK, KNH, KNS, KNL)
Applicable tubing material Nylon, Soft nylon, Flexible copper pipe (C1220T-O), OST pipe
Applicable piping O.D. mm ø4, ø6, ø8, ø10, ø12, ø16, ø20
Fluid Air, Coolant
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa (0.3 MPa with SGP pipe)
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Mounting JISB0203 (taper threads for piping)
Threads
Nut JISB0211, class 2 (taper threads for piping)
Seal for R threads None
82
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 83
Air Blow
Variations
Series KK
KK
Male thread type
Connection thread size R
Series M5 R 1/8 R 1/4 R 3/8 R 1/2 R 3/4
KK2
KK3
KK4
KK6
Female thread type
Connection thread size Rc
Series M5 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8 Rc 1/2
KK2
KK3
KK4
KK6
Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose)
Applicable hose I.D./O.D. mm
Series 5/8 6/9 6.5/10 8/12 8.5/12.5 11/16 Series KK3, 4, 6
KK3
KK4
KK6
One-touch fitting type (Straight, Elbow, Bulkhead)
Applicable tubing O.D. mm
Series ø3.2 ø4 ø6 ø8 ø10 ø12 ø16
KK2
Auxiliary Pneumatic
KK3
KK4
Equipment
KK6
Series KK2
Series KKH
Male thread type
Connection thread size R
Series R 1/8 R 1/4 R 3/8 R 1/2
KKH3
KKH4
Female thread type
Connection thread size Rc
Series Rc 1/8 Rc 1/4 Rc 3/8
KKH3
KKH4
Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose)
Applicable hose I.D./O.D. mm
Series 5/8 6/9 6.5/10 8/12 8.5/12.5
KKH3
KKH4
83
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 84
Series KK
Twice
as strong as the conventional models
We standardized the product with a sleeve cover. Changing the lock
ring material to a shock absorbent PBT further improved the shock
absorbent performance.
Sleeve cover (Except for Series KK2) Low leakage seal construction
Reliable sealing is achieved by surface contact.
Lightweight
Together with a reduction of the body size, pressing parts and resin
parts are used to achieve an overall weight reduction.
Series Plug no. Socket no. Effective area mm2 Note 1) Body O.D. mm Weight g Note 2)
Series KK2 KK2P-M5M KK2S-M5M 3.8 ø10.0 6.1
Series KK3 KK3P-01MS KK3S-01MS 20 ø20.2 20.1
Series KK4 KK4P-02MS KK4S-02MS 39 ø28.0 44.1
Series KK6 KK6P-04MS KK6S-04MS 82 ø31.6 90.1
Note 1) Values when plug and socket are connected.
Note 2) Values for socket only.
One-touch fitting type now standard Flow is possible from the plug side or socket side.
Three types from ø4 to ø16 added to series.
Fluids: Air and Water
Elbow type One-touch connection
Simple connection with one hand simplifies work.
Bulkhead type
q w
Click
Straight type
Lock
84
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 85
S Couplers Series KK
Auxiliary Pneumatic
6/9 -60N 6/9 -60N
1/4 6.5/10 -65N 1/4 6.5/10 -65N
Equipment
8/12 -80N 8/12 -80N
8.5/12.5 -85N 8.5/12.5 -85N
8/12 KK6P-80N 8/12 KK6S-80N
1/2 8.5/12.5 -85N 1/2 8.5/12.5 -85N
11/16 -110N 11/16 -110N
Straight type with One-touch fitting Straight type with One-touch fitting
Applicable Applicable
Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no. Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no.
3.2 KK2P-23H 3.2 KK2S-23H
M5 4 -04H M5 4 -04H
6 -06H 6 -06H
4 KK3P-04H 4 KK3S-04H
6 -06H 6 -06H
1/8 1/8
8 -08H 8 -08H
10 -10H 10 -10H
6 KK4P-06H 6 KK4S-06H
8 -08H 8 -08H
1/4 1/4
10 -10H 10 -10H
12 -12H 12 -12H
12 KK6P-12H 12 KK6S-12H
1/2 1/2
16 -16H 16 -16H
Elbow type with One-touch fitting Elbow type with One-touch fitting
Applicable Applicable
Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no. Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no.
3.2 KK2P-23L 3.2 KK2S-23L
M5 4 -04L M5 4 -04L
6 -06L 6 -06L
4 KK3P-04L 4 KK3S-04L
6 -06L 6 -06L
1/8 1/8
8 -08L 8 -08L
10 -10L 10 -10L
6 KK4P-06L 6 KK4S-06L
8 -08L 8 -08L
1/4 1/4
10 -10L 10 -10L
12 -12L 12 -12L
12 KK6P-12L 12 KK6S-12L
1/2 1/2
16 -16L 16 -16L
Bulkhead type with One-touch fitting Bulkhead type with One-touch fitting
Applicable Applicable
Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no. Body size tubing O.D. mm Part no.
3.2 KK2P-23E 3.2 KK2S-23E
M5 4 -04E M5 4 -04E
6 -06E 6 -06E
4 KK3P-04E 4 KK3S-04E
6 -06E 6 -06E
1/8 1/8
8 -08E 8 -08E
10 -10E 10 -10E
6 KK4P-06E 6 KK4S-06E
8 -08E 8 -08E
1/4 10 -10E 1/4 10 -10E
12 -12E 12 -12E
12 KK6P-12E 12 KK6S-12E
1/2 16 -16E 1/2 16 -16E
85
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 86
Series KK
Specifications
Performance
How to Order
KK 4 S 02 M S
Body size
2 M5 With sealant (male thread)
3 1/8
4 1/4 Connection type
6 1/2 Symbol Type
M Male thread
Socket/Plug designation F Female thread
S Socket N With nut fitting
P Plug H Straight with One-touch fitting
L Elbow with One-touch fitting
E Bulkhead with One-touch fitting
86
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 87
S Couplers Series KK
Flow Characteristics
Series KK2
0.45 Series KK2 (KK2S-M5M + KK2P-M5M)
(KK2S-M5M + KK2P-M5M) 0.006
0.40
0.35 0.005
Flow rate (l /min [ANR])
0.25
0.003
0.20
0.15 0.002
0.10
0.001
0.05
0.00 0.000
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Pressure (MPa) Pressure (MPa)
Equipment
KK3, 4, 6 KK3, 4, 6
11 0.14
7 0.09
0.08
6
0.07 Series KK4
5 Series KK4 (KK4S-02MS + KK4P-02MS)
0.06
(KK4S-02MS + KK4P-02MS)
4 0.05
3 0.04
0.03
2
0.02
1 Series KK3 Series KK3
0.01
(KK3S-01MS + KK3P-01MS) (KK3S-01MS + KK3P-01MS)
0 0.00
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Pressure (MPa) Pressure (MPa)
87
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 88
Series KK
Construction
KK2 q w q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !3 !2
Plug
Socket
Plug Socket
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Plug body Brass Electroless nickel plated 1 Spacer PBT
2 Gasket Stainless steel, NBR 2 Chuck PBT
3 Sleeve Brass Electroless nickel plated
4 Collar Brass Electroless nickel plated
5 Sleeve spring Stainless steel
6 Plug O-ring NBR
7 Valve seat PBT
8 Valve spring Stainless steel
9 Valve seat O-ring NBR
10 Valve O-ring FKM
11 Valve PBT
12 Socket body Brass Electroless nickel plated
KK3, 4, 6 13 Gasket Stainless steel, NBR
<With One-touch fitting> <With One-touch fitting>
!4 !5 q i u !7 !3 r !6 !1 t y !2 e !0 o w q !5 !4
Plug
Socket
Plug Socket
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Plug body Brass Electroless nickel plated 1 Socket body Brass Electroless nickel plated
14 Cassette — 2 Valve PBT
15 Seal NBR 3 Valve seat PBT
4 Collar PBT
5 Spacer PBT
6 Lock ring Shock absorbent PBT
7 Sleeve Cold rolled carbon steel sheet Electroless nickel plated
8 Chuck Stainless steel
9 Valve O-ring FKM
10 Valve seat O-ring NBR
11 Plug O-ring NBR
12 Valve spring Stainless steel
13 Sleeve spring Stainless steel
14 Cassette —
15 Seal NBR
16 Collar 2 Stainless steel
17 Sleeve cover Weather resistant NBR
88
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 89
S Couplers Series KK
Dimensions/Plug (P)
Auxiliary Pneumatic
M5 KK2P-M5F M5 x 0.8 8 17.6 12.3 3.4 8.1 2.6
T
Equipment
KK3P-01F Rc 1/8 14 28.3 18.4 10.4
1/8 -02F Rc 1/4 17 35.0 6.0 22.6 20.8
19.0
-03F Rc 3/8 19 36.8 23.2
KK4P-02F Rc 1/4 17 37.2 23.9
1/4 25.2 9.0 50.9 H L2
-03F 39.8 24.6
Rc 3/8 19 L1
KK6P-03F 43.3 28.6
1/2 31.0 13.0 106.2
-04F Rc 1/2 24 50.2 43.9
Nut fitting type (for urethane hose with fiber reinforcement) (mm)
H1 H2 Minimum Effective
Applicable
Body Weight
Model hose Width Width L1 L2 M bore area
size I.D./O.D. (mm) across flats across flats (mm2) (g)
Applicable hose
KK3P-50N 5/8 14 14 36.1 13.7 4.5 12.7 21.4
1/8 -60N 6/9 18.4 5.4 18.3 38.8
17 39.9 16.5 H2 H1
-65N 6.5/10 5.9 21.9 35.9
KK4P-50N 5/8 17 14 43.9 13.7 4.5 12.7 34.7
-60N 6/9 5.4 18.3 48.4
17 46.7 16.5
1/4 -65N 6.5/10 25.2 5.9 21.9 45.1
-80N 8/12 7.4 34.4 53.2
47.6 M L2
-85N 8.5/12.5 7.8 38.2 55.6
19 19 17.4 L1
KK6P-80N 8/12 7.4 34.4 60.5
53.4
1/2 -85N 8.5/12.5 31.0 7.8 38.2 62.8
-110N 11/16 24 24 57.2 20.1 10.2 65.4 96.5
89
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 90
Series KK
Dimensions/Plug (P)
øD1
øD2
1/8 18.4
-08H ø8 16.0 14.0 38.6 18.5 15.7 13.2
6.0 22.6
-10H ø10 19.0 17.0 39.7 21.0 22.6 17.6 L2
KK4P-06H ø6 14.0 12.0 17.0 4.7 10.1 12.8 22.3 L1
-08H ø8 16.0 14.0 46.2 18.5 6.2 19.8 22.6 23.0
1/4 25.2
-10H ø10 19.0 17.0 21.0 7.7 27.6 35.3 27.1
-12H 47.5 9.0 40.2 30.0
ø12 21.0 19.0 22.0 50.9
KK6P-12H 9.2 41.2 44.4
1/2 56.1 31.0
-16H ø16 26.0 25.7 25.0 13.0 — 106.2 50.7
øD1
-08L ø8 12.0 15.2 34.0 23.0 18.5 15.0 16.8 9.7
6.0
-10L ø10 17.0 18.5 36.0 26.5 21.0 18.0 18.5 23.0
L2
KK4P-06L ø6 12.8 40.2 20.0 17.0 4.5 10.1 11.4 19.6 L1
14.0
-08L ø8 15.2 41.4 25.2 23.0 18.5 6.0 17.5 19.8 21.3
1/4
-10L 18.5 42.8 26.5 21.0 7.5 24.7 27.5 25.7
ø10 17.0
-12L 44.0 29.0 29.6 28.0
20.9 28.5 22.0 9.0
KK6P-12L ø12 19.0 49.9 31.0 38.1 39.7 40.3
1/2
-16L ø16 21.0 26.5 53.5 34.0 25.0 13.0 — 58.7 48.7
90
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 91
S Couplers Series KK
Dimensions/Socket (S)
Male thread type (mm)
øD
KK3S-01MS R 1/8 33.5 36.0 6.0 20.4 20.1
14 37.5 40.0
1/8 -02MS R 1/4 20.2 31.5 34.0 19.2
9.0 21.1
-03MS R 3/8 17 38.7 41.2 32.2 34.5 29.0 L1 H
KK3·4·6 L2
KK4S-01MS R 1/8 50.4 54.1 46.4 50.16.0 22.9 47.5
-02MS R 1/4 19 51.0 54.7 45.0 48.79.0 38.9 44.1
1/4 28.0
-03MS R 3/8 50.0 53.7 43.5 47.2 11.0 40.4 50.9
KK3·4·6
-04MS R 1/2 22 49.7 53.4 41.7 45.4 13.0 42.7 61.2 A2
KK6S-03MS R 3/8 53.7 59.0 11.0 71.7 87.9 A1 T
24
1/2 -04MS R 1/2 31.6 60.2 65.5 52.2 57.5 13.0 82.3 90.1
-06MS R 3/4 27 50.7 56.0 15.0 83.8 113.3
øD
∗ Reference dimension for R threads after installation.
L1 H
L2
Auxiliary Pneumatic
T H L2 Effective
KK2 Body T
Model Connection Width
across øD L1 When Minimum area Weight
KK2
Equipment
size male thread connected bore (mm2) (g)
flats
M5 KK2S-M5F M5 x 0.8 8 10.0 25.3 26.8 4.2 5.4 6.4
øD
KK3S-01F Rc 1/8 14 36.0 38.5 20.6 23.6
1/8 -02F Rc 1/4 17 20.2 40.1 42.6 8.2 34.4 L1 H
21.1
KK3·4·6 -03F Rc 3/8 41.9 44.4 38.8 L2
KK4S-02F Rc 1/4 19 50.4 54.1 10.9 39.6 56.9
1/4 28.0
-03F 51.1 54.8 42.7 46.2 T
Rc 3/8 14.4 KK3·4·6
KK6S-03F 58.6 63.9 83.1 93.6
1/2 24 31.6
-04F Rc 1/2 61.0 66.3 18.0 83.8 87.4
øD
L1 H
L2
Nut fitting type (for urethane hose with fiber reinforcement) (mm)
H1 H2 L2
Minimum Effective
Applicable
Body Model hose
Width Width
øD L1 When M area Weight
size across across bore (g)
I.D./O.D. (mm) flats flats connected (mm2)
Applicable hose
KK3S-50N 5/8 14 14 42.6 45.1 13.7 4.5 12.2 32.1
1/8 -60N 6/9 20.2 5.4 18.3 48.7
17 17 44.4 46.9 16.5 H1 H2
-65N 6.5/10 5.9 19.2 46.4
KK4S-50N 5/8 14 54.1 57.8 13.7 4.5 12.2 55.8
øD
91
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 92
Series KK
Dimensions/Socket (S)
øD2
O.D. (mm) connected Applicable tubing
tubing tubing
KK2 KK2S-23H ø3.2 7.0 33.8 35.3 2.5 3.8 4.6 6.4
12.7
øD1
M5 -04H ø4 10.0 8.0 33.6 35.1 3.4 4.0 4.8 6.5
-06H ø6 10.0 33.9 35.4 13.5 4.7 5.8 5.8 7.9
M
KK3S-04H ø4 10.0 46.6 49.1 16.0 3.2 3.8 5.8 22.5 L1
-06H ø6 12.0 47.1 49.6 17.0 4.7 10.4 13.4 24.4 L2
1/8 20.2
-08H ø8 14.0 48.9 51.4 18.5 6.2 16.8 18.9 27.3
KK3·4·6
-10H ø10 17.0 49.9 52.4 21.0 7.7 19.1 19.1 37.1 KK3·4·6
KK4S-06H ø6 12.0 58.2 61.9 17.0 4.7 10.4 13.4 51.4 Applicable tubing
øD2
-08H ø8 14.0 60.1 63.8 18.5 6.2 18.3 21.8 51.3
1/4 28.0
øD1
-10H ø10 17.0 61.5 65.2 21.0 7.7 27.0 29.4 54.8
-12H 62.5 66.2 30.5 32.0 59.4
ø12 19.0 22.0 9.2 M
KK6S-12H 70.1 75.4 42.7 48.8 84.1 L1
1/2 31.6
-16H ø16 25.7 72.3 77.6 25.0 13.2 53.4 62.5 99.9 L2
KK2S-23L ø3.2
M
L3
9.3 26.0 27.5 16.5 12.7 2.5 3.7 4.4 6.7
M5 -04L ø4 10.0
øD1
-06L ø6 11.6 27.2 28.3 16.6 13.5 4.5 5.6 5.6 7.2
KK3S-04L ø4 10.4 41.7 44.2 18.0 16.0 3.0 3.7 5.3 23.2
L1
-06L ø6 12.8 42.9 45.4 20.0 17.0 4.5 10.1 11.4 24.0
1/8 20.2 L2
-08L ø8 15.2 43.1 45.6 23.0 18.5 6.0 15.0 16.8 25.0
KK3·4·6 -10L ø10 18.5 42.9 45.4 26.5 21.0 7.5 18.0 18.5 34.4 KK3·4·6
KK4S-06L ø6 12.8 54.3 58.0 20.0 17.0 4.5 10.1 11.4 53.5 øD2
-08L ø8 15.2 55.5 59.2 23.0 18.5 6.0 17.5 19.8 53.1 Applicable tubing
1/4 28.0
18.5 54.2 57.9 26.5 21.0 7.5
M
-10L ø10 24.7 27.5 54.7
L3
øD1
-06E ø6 M11 x 0.75 14 33.9 35.4 13.1 13.5 4.7 5.8 5.8 12.6
14
KK3S-04E ø4 M12 x 1 14 46.6 49.1 16.9 16.0 3.2 3.8 5.8 29.0 M
L3
-06E ø6 M14 x 1 17 47.1 49.6 16.8 17.0 4.7 10.4 13.4 39.4
1/8 17 20.2 L1
-08E ø8 M16 x 1 19 49.0 51.5 20.0 18.5 6.2 16.8 18.9 43.4 L2
-10E ø10 M20 x 1 22 24 49.9 52.4 22.0 21.0 7.7 19.1 19.1 68.3
KK3·4·6
KK4S-06E ø6 M14 x 1 17 58.2 61.9 16.8 17.0 4.7 10.4 13.4 57.2 KK3·4·6 Applicable tubing
19
-08E ø8 M16 x 1 19 60.1 63.8 20.0 18.5 6.2 18.3 21.8 60.6 Mounting plate thickness H2
1/4 28.0
-10E ø10 M20 x 1 22 24 61.7 65.4 22.0 21.0 7.7 27.0 29.4 86.8 7 mm or less T
H1
-12E 62.7 66.4 23.0 22.0 30.5 32.0 105.7
ø12 M22 x 1 24 27 9.2
KK6S-12E 70.1 75.4 42.7 48.8 116.0
øD
Auxiliary Pneumatic
(Rubber) as that of Series KK.
Equipment
Plug (P) Socket (S)
Male thread type Male thread type
Connection Connection
Body size port size Part no. Body size port size Part no.
R 1/8 KK3P-01MS R 1/8 KKH3S-01MS
1/8 R 1/4 -02MS 1/8 R 1/4 -02MS
R 3/8 -03MS R 3/8 -03MS
R 1/8 KK4P-01MS R 1/8 KKH4S-01MS
R 1/4 -02MS R 1/4 -02MS
1/4 1/4
R 3/8 -03MS R 3/8 -03MS
R 1/2 -04MS R 1/2 -04MS
Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose) Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose)
Applicable hose Applicable hose
Body size I.D./O.D. mm Part no. Body size I.D./O.D. mm Part no.
5/8 KK3P-50N 5/8 KKH3S-50N
1/8 6/9 -60N 1/8 6/9 -60N
6.5/10 -65N 6.5/10 -65N
5/8 KK4P-50N 5/8 KKH4S-50N
6/9 -60N 6/9 -60N
1/4 6.5/10 -65N 1/4 6.5/10 -65N
8/12 -80N 8/12 -80N
8.5/12.5 -85N 8.5/12.5 -85N
93
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 94
Series KKH
Specifications
Effective Area
How to Order
KKH 4 S 02 M S
Body size With seal (male thread)
3 1/8
4 1/4
Connection type
Symbol Type
Socket/Plug designation M Male thread
S Socket F Female thread
N With nut fitting
94
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 95
øD
1/8 -02MS R 1/4 20.2 31.5 34.0 9.0 19.4
21.1
-03MS R 3/8 17 38.7 41.2 32.2 34.5 9.0 27.7
L1 H
KKH4S-01MS R 1/8 50.4 54.1 46.4 50.1 6.0 22.9 48.7
L2
-02MS R 1/4 19 51.0 54.7 45.0 48.7 9.0 38.9 45.3
1/4 28.0
-03MS R 3/8 50.0 53.7 43.5 47.2 11.0 40.4 52.1
-04MS R 1/2 22 49.7 53.4 41.7 45.4 13.0 42.7 62.4
∗ Reference dimension for R threads after installation.
øD
1/8 -02F Rc 1/4 17 20.2 40.1 42.4 8.2 33.1
21.1
-03F Rc 3/8 19 41.9 44.3 37.1 H
L1
KKH4S-02F Rc 1/4 50.4 54.1 10.9 39.6 58.1 L2
1/4 19 28.0
-03F Rc 3/8 51.1 54.8 14.4 42.7 47.4
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Equipment
Nut fitting type (for fiber reinforced urethane hose) (mm)
Body
Applicable H1 H2 L2 Min. Effective
Weight
Model hose Width Width D L1 When M bore area
size I.D./O.D. mm across flats across flats connected size (mm2) (g) Applicable hose
KKH3S-50N 5/8 14 14 42.6 45.1 13.7 4.5 12.2 32.3 H1 H2
Series KKH are only available as sockets. Series KK should be used as plugs. For dimensions, please refer to page 89.
95
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 96
Series KKA
Reduces liquid dripping when the plug and socket are uncoupled.
Liquid dripping: 0.02 to 0.77 cm3 at each removal
Aeration: 0.1 to 2.7 cm3 at each removal
96
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 97
Auxiliary Pneumatic
size With check valve Without check valve size With check valve Without check valve
Rc 1/8 KKA3P-01F KKA3P-01F-1 Rc 1/8 KKA3S-01F KKA3S-01F-1
Equipment
1/8 Rc 1/4 -02F -02F-1 1/8 Rc 1/4 -02F -02F-1
Rc 3/8 -03F -03F-1 Rc 3/8 -03F -03F-1
Rc 1/4 KKA4P-02F KKA4P-02F-1 Rc 1/4 KKA4S-02F KKA4S-02F-1
1/4 Rc 3/8 -03F -03F-1 1/4 Rc 3/8 -03F -03F-1
Rc 1/2 -04F -04F-1 Rc 1/2 -04F -04F-1
Rc 3/8 KKA6P-03F KKA6P-03F-1 Rc 3/8 KKA6S-03F KKA6S-03F-1
With check valve 1/2 Rc 1/2 -04F -04F-1 1/2 Rc 1/2 -04F -04F-1
Rc 3/4 -06F -06F-1 Rc 3/4 -06F -06F-1
Rc 1/2 KKA7P-04F — Rc 1/2 KKA7S-04F —
3/4 Rc 3/4 -06F — 3/4 Rc 3/4 -06F —
Rc 1 -10F — Rc 1 -10F —
Rc 3/4 KKA8P-06F — Rc 3/4 KKA8S-06F —
1 Rc 1 -10F — 1 Rc 1 -10F —
Without check valve Rc 1 1/4 -12F — Rc 1 1/4 -12F —
Rc 1 KKA9P-10F — Rc 1 KKA9S-10F —
1 1/4 Rc 1 1/4 -12F — 1 1/4 Rc 1 1/4 -12F —
Rc 1 1/2 -14F — Rc 1 1/2 -14F —
97
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 98
Series KKA
Stainless Steel Type
Specifications
Fluid Water/Air
Operating Note) KKA3: –100 kPa to 1.0 MPa
pressure range KKA4, 6, 7, 8, 9: 0 to 1.0 MPa
Proof pressure 10 MPa
Ambient and –5 to 150°C (No freezing)
fluid temperature Note) Do not use with steam.
Non-greased No grease is used.
JIS symbol Rubber: Fluorine coated,
specification Metal sliding parts: Plated with fluorine-contained material
Single plug Single socket
With
Material Metal part: Stainless steel 304, Rubber material: Fluoro rubber (FKM)
check valve Seal With male thread seal
Note) Do not use the S couplers with a leak tester or for vacuum retention because they are not guaranteed for zero leakage.
Without
check valve
Performance
Connected plug and socket
Check valve Plug and socket connection One-touch connection and release
on both sides: Check valve Plug and socket are available with and without check valves.
Check valve Note) Series KKA cannot be connected with Series KK or Series KKH.
on single side:
How to Order
KKA 4 P 02 M -1
Body size Built-in check valve
3 1/8 Socket/Plug designation Nil With check valve
4 1/4 P Plug -1 Without check valve Note)
6 1/2 S Socket Port size Note) KKA7/8/9 is not available without a
7 3/4 Symbol Thread size check valve.
8 1 01 R, Rc 1/8 Contact us when such a type is
needed.
9 1 1/4 02 R, Rc 1/4
03 R, Rc 3/8
Connection type
Plug Socket Availability 04 R, Rc 1/2
Symbol Type
Yes Yes 06 R, Rc 3/4
No Yes 10 R, Rc 1 M Mail thread (with seal)
Built-in
check valve No No 12 R, Rc 1 1/4 F Female thread
Yes No 14 R, Rc 1 1/2
Note) A plug with check valve should be used in combination
with a socket with check valve.
If a socket without check valve is used, the check
valve of the plug will not open.
98
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 99
Flow Characteristics
Air
Plug: With check valve Socket: With check valve Plug: With check valve Socket: With check valve
10 50
9 45 Series KKA9
Series KKA6 (KKA9P-12F+KKA9S-12F)
8 (KKA6P-04F+KKA6S-04F) 40
Flow rate m3/min (ANR)
6 30
Series KKA8
5 25 (KKA8P-10F+KKA8S-10F)
Series KKA4
4 20
(KKA4P-02F+KKA4S-02F)
3 15
2 10
Plug: Without check valve Socket: With check valve Plug: Without check valve Socket: Without check valve
10 10
Auxiliary Pneumatic
9 9 Series KKA6
(KKA6P-04M-1+KKA6S-04M-1)
8 8
Equipment
Series KKA6
Flow rate m3/min (ANR)
7 (KKA6P-04M-1+KKA6S-04M) 7
Series KKA4
6 6
(KKA4P-02M-1+KKA4S-02M-1)
5 Series KKA4 5
(KKA4P-02M-1+KKA4S-02M)
4 4
3 3
2 2
Pressure Loss
Water
Plug: With check valve Socket: With check valve Plug: With check valve Socket: With check valve
0.2 0.2
Series KKA3 Series KKA8
0.175 (KKA3P-01F+KKA3S-01F) 0.175 (KKA8P-10F+KKA8S-10F)
0.15 0.15
Series KKA7
Pressure loss (MPa)
Series KKA4
0.125 (KKA4P-02F+KKA4S-02F) 0.125 (KKA7P-06F+KKA7S-06F)
0.1 0.1
0.075 0.075
Series KKA9
(KKA9P-12F+KKA9S-12F)
0.05 0.05
99
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 100
Series KKA
Construction
t w q y e r u !3 !2 y r !0 !1 t o q i e w
Plug Socket
Plug Socket
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Stem Stainless steel Plated with fluorine-contained material 1 Body Stainless steel Plated with fluorine-contained material
2 Rear stem Stainless steel 2 Rear body Stainless steel
3 Plug valve Stainless steel 3 Socket valve Stainless steel
4 Valve O-ring FKM Fluorine coated 4 Collar Stainless steel Plated with fluorine-contained material
5 Stem O-ring FKM Fluorine coated 5 Sleeve Stainless steel Plated with fluorine-contained material
6 Plug valve spring Stainless steel 6 Valve O-ring FKM Fluorine coated
7 Plug O-ring FKM Fluorine coated
8 Body O-ring FKM Fluorine coated
9 Collar seal FKM Fluorine coated
10 Collar spring Stainless steel
11 Sleeve spring Stainless steel
12 Steel ball Stainless steel
13 Stopper ring Stainless steel
100
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 101
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Female thread type (mm)
Equipment
Body T H Min. Effective
Model L1 L2 bore area Weight
Connection Width
size port size across flats size (mm2) (g)
KKA3P-01F Rc 1/8 14 36.0 20.2
1/8 -02F Rc 1/4 17 39.6 16.0 5.6 17.4 31.8
-03F Rc 3/8 19 40.4 35.8
KKA4P-02F Rc 1/4 17 43.4 36.1
1/4 -03F Rc 3/8 19 44.4 18.9 6.9 26.4 40.2
-04F Rc 1/2 48.6 69.7
T
KKA6P-03F Rc 3/8 24 48.7 84.1
1/2 -04F Rc 1/2 52.9 20.4 10.0 54.2 79.7
-06F Rc 3/4 30 54.6 123.8
KKA7P-04F Rc 1/2 67.7 217.1
32
3/4 -06F Rc 3/4 69.4 27.6 13.5 99.6 196.8 H L2
-10F Rc 1 72.4 325.9 L1
KKA8P-06F Rc 3/4 41 82.0 420.5
1 -10F Rc 1 85.0 35.6 17.5 168.3 391.3
-12F Rc 1 1/4 50 87.3 552.8
KKA9P-10F Rc 1 107.8 986.9
1 1/4 -12F Rc 1 1/4 55 110.1 49.1 24.6 332.1 925.6
-14F Rc 1 1/2 110.1 848.2
101
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 102
Series KKA
øD
1/2 -04M R 1/2 30 30.7 54.4 46.4 10.2 55.3 160.4
-06M R 3/4 56.4 46.9 184.8
KKA7S-04M R 1/2 76.3 68.1 426.1
3/4 -06M R 3/4 36 42.5 79.3 69.8 13.6 101.5 457.8 H
102
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 103
Auxiliary Pneumatic
KKA6P-03F-1 H L2
Rc 3/8 22 30.9 34.3
L1
1/2 -04F-1 Rc 1/2 24 39.6 20.4 11.0 76.0 50.0
Equipment
-06F-1 Rc 3/4 30 42.8 78.6
103
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 104
Inner tube
Soft nylon
Series - 20m roll
- 100m reel
Outer layer Tube size
Metric size
Model TRBU0604 TRBU0805 TRBU1065 TRBU1208
Sectional view of FR double layer tube Inner tube O.D. (mm) 6 8 10 12
Inner tube I.D. (mm) 4 5 6.5 8
Burst Pressure Characteristics Outer layer thickness (mm) 1 1 1 1
Curve and Operating Pressure
Outer layer color Note 1)
Black (B)
White (W)
Red (R)
Bu
rst Blue (BU)
pr
es
su Yellow (Y)
Burst pressure (MPa)
Bu re
rst (T
pre RB Green (G)
ssu 06
re 04
(ex )
cep
tT
RB
06
04
)
Maximum operating pressure
Specifications
(TRB0604) Fluid Air, Water Note 2)
Maximum operating pressure Maximum operating Note 3)
(except TRB0604) pressure (at 20°C) 1.0MPa
Burst pressure Refer to burst pressure characteristics curve.
Minimum bending Note 4)
Operating temperature (°C) radius (mm) 15 28 35 45
Operating Temperature –20 to 60°C, For water: 0 to 60°C (with no freezing)
Inner tube Nylon 12
Materials
Outer layer PVC (equivalent to UL-94 standard V-0)
Note 1) The color of all inner tubes is black.
Note 2) Can be used with general industrial water. Contact SMC if used with other fluids. Also keep surge
pressure at or below the maximum operating pressure.
Note 3) In the case of other temperatures, refer to the burst pressure characteristics curve. In addition,
operate so that abnormal temperature increase due to adiabatic compression does not occur.
Note 4) Indicates the bending value when the outside diameter rate of change is 10% or less at a
temperature of 20°C.
104
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 105
Inner tube
Polyurethane
Outer layer
Series - 20m roll
- 100m reel
Tube size
Metric size
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Model TRBU0604 TRBU0805 TRBU1065 TRBU1208
Inner tube O.D. (mm) 6 8 10 12
Equipment
Burst Pressure Characteristics Inner tube I.D. (mm) 4 5 6.5 8
Curve and Operating Pressure Outer layer thickness (mm) 1 1 1 1
Outer layer color Note 1)
Black (B)
5.0
White (W)
Red (R)
Burst pressure (MPa)
4.0
Bu Blue (BU)
rst
3.0 pre Yellow (Y)
ssu
re
Green (G)
2.0
105
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 106
Tubing guide
Cutter
Outer layer
Adjustment of cutter and
Inner tube
stripping length is unnecessary
A constant stripping length is always possible
due to the fixed cutter with angle that cuts until
the tubing reaches the end surface inside the
Pawl stripper.
Socket adapter
Variations
Dimensions mm Weight
Model Tip Applicable tubing∗
color D1 D2 L g
TKS-06 Orange TRB0604, TRBU0604 16
58 45
øD2
øD1
106
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 107
Coil Tubing
Burst pressure (MPa)
Bu
rst
pre
ssu
re
O.D. I.D. Color No. of tubes Max. operating length m Model
Black (B) 1 TCU0425B-1
1.5
4 2.5 Black (B) 2 TCU0425B-2
Max. ope
rating pre Black (B) 3 1 TCU0425B-3
ssure
Black (B) 1 2 TCU0604B-1
6 4
Auxiliary Pneumatic
2
Black (B) 3 1 TCU0604B-3
Equipment
Operating temperature (°C) 8 5 Black (B) 1 2 TCU0805B-1
Tube Cutter
Series TK Air Leakage
TK-1 Applicable tube O.D.: 13 mm or less TK-2 Applicable tube O.D.: 18 mm or less TK-3 (Simplified type)
Applicable tube O.D.: 12 mm or less
107
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 108
How to Order
AR 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
Body size 1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR10 to 60
N Non-relieving AR10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 60 R Flow direction: Right Left AR10 to 60
Y Upward handle AR10 to 60
AR20 Thread type Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR10 to 60
Metric thread (M5) ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
Nil alphanumeric order.
Rc
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
N NPT for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
F G Note 3) For M5 and NPT thread types.Note2) This product is for overseas use only according
Port size to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Port Body size
Symbol Accessory Note 1)
size 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
M5 — — — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model
M5
01 1/8 — — — — — — Nil — —
02 1/4 — — — B With bracket AR10 to 60
03 3/8 — — — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
04 1/2 — — — — — — With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AR10
G
AR40 06 3/4 — — — — — With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
10 1 — — — — — H With set nut (For panel mount) AR10 to 40
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
of shipment (except option E).
Accessory/Optional Specifications : Combination available : Combination not available
Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable regulator
JIS symbol Symbol
Accessory/Optional specifications B E G H 1 N R Y Z AR10 AR20~40 AR50~60
With bracket (With set nut) B
Accessory
Non-relieving type -N
Optional
Standard Specifications
Model AR425 AR435 AR625 AR635 AR825 AR835 AR925 AR935
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range (MPa) (1) 0.05 to 0.83 0.02 to 0.2 0.05 to 0.83 0.02 to 0.2 0.05 to 0.83 0.02 to 0.2 0.05 to 0.83 0.02 to 0.2
Air consumption (for bleed hole) (2) 5 l/min (ANR) (at maximum pressure)
Pressure gauge port size 1 4
Auxiliary Pneumatic
• Please consult with SMC for NPT pressure gauge.
Equipment
How to Order
Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT
JIS symbol
F G
AR65-BG AR425-BG
109
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 110
How to Order
110
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 111
JIS symbol
AW20 AW40
How to Order
AW 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Filter regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (5) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW10 to 40
Body size 2 Metal bowl AW10 to 40
10 20 30 40 6 Nylon bowl AW10 to 40
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30/40
C With bowl guard AW20
Auxiliary Pneumatic
Thread type J (6) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40
Metric thread (M5) N Non-relieving AW10 to 40
Equipment
Nil
Rc R Flow direction: Right Left AW10 to 40
(1)
N NPT W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30/40
F (2) G Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW10 to 40
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
AW30 and 40), and the exhaust port for Note 5) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for the regu-
auto-drain comes with ø3/8" One-touch lator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
fitting (applicable to AW30 and AW40). Note 6) Without a valve function.
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Note 7) For M5 and NPT thread types. This product is for overseas use only according to the
AW30 and AW40). new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Accessory (3)
Symbol Description Applicable model
Port size
Nil — —
Port Body size
Symbol B With bracket AW10 to 40
size 10 20 30 40 C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) AW10 to 40
M5 M5 — — — D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) AW30/40
01 1/8 — — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
02 1/4 — With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AW10
03 3/8 — — G
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
04 1/2 — — — H With set nut (For panel mount) AW10 to 40
06 3/4 — — — Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of ship-
ment (except options C, D and E).
Metal bowl –2
Nylon bowl –6
Metal bowl with level gauge –8
With bowl guard –C
Drain guide 1/4 –J
Non-relieving type –N
Flow direction: Right Left –R
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing –W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) –Z
111
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 112
Series AW10 to 40
Standard Specifications
Model AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Port sizes M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (1) 1/16 (2) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (3) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Drain capacity (cm3) 2.5 8 25 45 45
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.09 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20 to AW40).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting R 1/8 pressure gauge to R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Not applicable to AW10.
112
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 113
How to Order
AW 30 K F 03 BE 1N
Filter regulator Option
Symbol Description Applicable model
Body size 1 (4) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW20K to 40K
2 Metal bowl AW20K to 40K
20 30 40 6 Nylon bowl AW20K to 40K
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30K/40K
With back flow mechanism C With bowl guard AW20K
Note) AW10 comes with a back flow mechanism as J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AW30K/40K
a standard feature. N Non-relieving type AW20K to 40K
If the set pressure is not exceeding 0.15 MPa, R Flow direction: Right Left AW20K to 40K
back flow may not occur. When a back flow W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30K/40K
AW40K mechanism is required with a set pressure of
Z (6) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW20K to 40K
less than 0.15 MPa, please contact SMC.
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Thread type Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Nil Rc AW30K and 40K), and the exhaust Note 5) Without a valve function.
N (1) NPT port for auto-drain comes with ø3/8" Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
One-touch fitting (applicable to new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
F (2) G AW30K and AW40K). Accessory (3)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Symbol Description Applicable model
AW30K and AW40K).
Nil — —
Port size B With bracket AW20K to 40K
Port Body size C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) AW20K to 40K
Symbol
size 20 30 40 D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) AW30K/40K
AW20K 01 1/8 — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
Auxiliary Pneumatic
02 1/4 G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
03 3/8 — H With set nut (For panel mount) AW20K to 40K
Equipment
04 1/2 — — Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
Standard of shipment (except options C, D and E).
06 3/4 — —
Specifications
Model AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range (1) 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (2) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
JIS symbol Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard Option Standard
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20K
to AW40K).
113
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 114
Air filter Filter regulator Air filter (large capacity) Mist separator Mist separator
Series AF Series AW Series AF Series AFM regulator
Series AWM
Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no.
AF10 AF10P-060S AW10 AF10P-060S
AF20 AF20P-060S AW20 AF20P-060S
AF30 AF30P-060S AW30 AF30P-060S
AF40 AF40P-060S AW40 AF40P-060S Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no.
AF40-06 AF40P-060S AW40-06 AF40P-060S Filter model Element part no. AFM20 AFM20P-060AS AWM20 AFM20P-060AS
AF50 AF50P-060S AF800 11345-5B AFM30 AFM30P-060AS AWM30 AFM30P-060AS
AF60 AF60P-060S AF900 11352-5B AFM40 AFM40P-060AS AWM40 AFM40P-060AS
Micro mist separator Micro mist separator Main line filter Free standing Mist separator
Series AFD regulator Series AFF main line filter Series AM
Series AWD Series AFF
Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no.
AFF2B AFF-EL2B AFF75A EC700-003N AM150 AM-EL150
AFF4B AFF-EL4B AFF125A EC700-003N AM250 AM-EL250
AFF8B AFF-EL8B AFF150A EC800-003N AM350 AM-EL350
Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no. AFF11B AFF-EL11B AFF220A EC900-003N AM450 AM-EL450
AFD20 AFD20P-060AS AWD20 AFD20P-060AS AFF22B AFF-EL22B AM550 AM-EL550
AFD30 AFD30P-060AS AWD30 AFD30P-060AS AFF37B AFF-EL37B AM650 AM-EL650
AFD40 AFD40P-060AS AWD40 AFD40P-060AS AFF75B AFF-EL75B AM850 AM-EL850
Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no.
AMD150 AMD-EL150 AMD800 63174 AMH150 AMH-EL150 AME150 AME-EL150
AMD250 AMD-EL250 AMD801 63174 AMH250 AMH-EL250 AME250 AME-EL250
AMD350 AMD-EL350 AMD900 63174 (3 pcs.) AMH350 AMH-EL350 AME350 AME-EL350
AMD450 AMD-EL450 AMD901 63174 (3 pcs.) AMH450 AMH-EL450 AME450 AME-EL450
AMD550 AMD-EL550 AMD1000 63174 (5 pcs.) AMH550 AMH-EL550 AME550 AME-EL550
AMD650 AMD-EL650 AMH650 AMH-EL650 AME650 AME-EL650
AMD850 AMD-EL850 AMH850 AMH-EL850 AME850 AMH-EL850
Filter model Element part no. Filter model Element part no.
AMF150 AMF-EL150 AMF800 63271
AMF250 AMF-EL250 AMF801 63271
AMF350 AMF-EL350 AMF900 63271 (3 pcs.)
AMF450 AMF-EL450 AMF901 63271 (3 pcs.)
AMF550 AMF-EL550 AMF1000 63271 (5 pcs.)
AMF650 AMF-EL650
AMF850 AMF-EL850
114
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 115
GD40-2-01
Differential Pressure Gauge Air Line
Maintenance
Caution Caution
A differential pressure gauge cannot be used in a Mounting
location with frequent pulsation. 1) The HIGH and LOW marks on the back of the
differential pressure gauge indicate high pressure
Auxiliary Pneumatic
and low pressure sides, respectively. Connect the
HIGH side to the primary side and the LOW side
Equipment
to the secondary side of filters and other
equipment. Do not use a stop valve, as damage
JIS symbol
to the differential pressure gauge may occur if the
valve is inadvertently left open or closed.
2) Install the differential pressure gauge vertically.
3) Securely connect the piping of the differential
pressure gauge, because it will be damaged if
the piping becomes detached.
Differential
pressure gauge
ø62
Thread depth 7
115
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 116
Size Size
8B AMH 350 F 03
04
C
D
M
R
06 BC T
11B 450 10 BD JR
14 MR
22B 550 20 JT
MT
37B 650 RT
JRT
75B 850 MRT
Bore Option
size 01 02 03 04 06 10 14 20 Size J M R T JR MR JT MT RT JRT MRT
Size Accessory
2B, 150 Nil
4B, 250 2B, B
8B, 350 150 C
to
11B, 450 D
22B,
22B, 550 550 BC
37B, 650 BD
75B, 850 Nil
37B, B
650 D
BD
Refer to the “Air Preparation Equipment” portion of Nil
Best Pneumatics Vol. 14 for selecting the model 75B, B
number and size of a mist separator, etc. 850 D
BD
: Applicable (Combinations other than those indicated are not possible.)
116
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 117
Sensors/Measuring Instruments
RESET
SET
Measuring Instruments
Negative pressure detection valve (Special order product) Liquid removal 224
Sensors
117
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 118
Air Line
Maintenance
For Air
For Water
Application examples
Flow control of N2 gas to prevent Flow control of cooling water for wafer Flow control of
detection temperature regulation and high pressurized
Clean gas filter
camera frequency cooling water for
shimmering electric welding gun
and lead power
frame supply
oxidation
Set the clean gas
filter on the outlet side
piping of the flow switch.
M/C
Make possible the monitoring A COM B COM DC12V GND F.G. R.S. HOLD COM BANK1 BANK2
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5 UP
M/C
COUNT PRESET FUNC.
DOWN
118
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 119
How to Order
Integrated
display type PF2A7 10 01 27 M
Flow rate range
10 1 to 10 l/min Thread type Unit specification
50 5 to 50 l/min Nil Rc Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.) With unit
Nil switching function
11 10 to 100 l/min N NPT Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector M Fixed SI unit Note)
21 20 to 200 l/min F G N Without lead wire Note) Fixed unit:
51 50 to 500 l/min Real-time flow rate: l/min
Port size Output specification Accumulated flow: l
Port Flow rate (l/min)
Symbol size Applicable model Symbol Output specification
10 50 100 200 500
01 1/8 27 NPN open collector 2 outputs
PF2A710, PF2A750
02 1/4
03 3/8 PF2A711, PF2A721 67 PNP open collector 2 outputs
04 1/2 PF2A751
Specifications
Model PF2A710 PF2A750 PF2A711 PF2A721 PF2A751
Measured fluid Air, Nitrogen
Flow rate measurement range 0.5 to 10.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Set flow rate range 0.5 to 10.5l /min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Flow rate measuring range 1 to 10 l/min 5 to 50 l/min 10 to 100 l/min 20 to 200 l/min 50 to 500 l/min
Minimum set unit 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 50 ms) 0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse 2 l/pulse 5 l/pulse
Sensors Measuring
Note 1, 2) Real-time flow rate l/min, CFM x 10–2 l/min, CFM x 10–1
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, ft3 x 10–1
Instruments
Operating fluid temperature 0 to 50°C
Linearity ±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability ±1% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less
Temperature characteristics ±3% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C), ±5% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
Current consumption (No load) 150 mA or less 160 mA or less 170 mA or less
Weight Note 3) 250 g 290 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8, 1/4 3/8 1/2
Detection type Heater type
Display 3-digit, 7-segment LED
Operating pressure range –50 kPa to 0.5 MPa –50 kPa to 0.75 MPa
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa
Accumulated flow range Note 4) 0 to 999999 l
Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Output Note 5)
specification
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized)
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Note 1) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m3 or m3 x 103)] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 2) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of 0°C, 101.3 kPa and the standard condition (ANR) of 20°C, 101.3 kPa, and 65% RH.
Note 3) Without lead wire.
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2 to
be P_3, 4.)
Note 7) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark.
119
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 120
Series PF2A
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit PF2A5 10 01 C
Flow rate range
10 1 to 10 l/min
50 5 to 50 l/min Thread type Option (Refer to page 152.)
11 10 to 100 l/min
Nil Rc Nil None
21 20 to 200 l/min
N NPT C e-con connector x 1 pc.
51 50 to 500 l/min
F G The cable and connector are shipped
unassembled.
Port size
Port Flow rate (l/min)
Symbol Applicable model Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.)
size 10 50 100 200 500
01 1/8 Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector
PF2A510, 550
02 1/4 N Without lead wire
03 3/8 PF2A511, 521
04 1/2 PF2A551
Output specification
Symbol Specification Applicable display unit (monitor) model
Nil Output for display unit Series PF2A300
1 Output for display unit + analog output (1 to 5 V) Series PF2A200/300
2 Output for display unit + analog output (4 to 20 mA) Series PF2A300
Specifications
Model PF2A510 PF2A550 PF2A511 PF2A521 PF2A551
Measured fluid Air, Nitrogen
Detection type Heater type
Flow rate measuring range 1 to 10 l/min 5 to 50 l/min 10 to 100 l/min 20 to 200 l/min 50 to 500 l/min
Operating pressure range –50 kPa to 0.5 MPa –50 kPa to 0.75 MPa
Withstand pressure 1.0 MPa
Operating fluid temperature 0 to 50°C
Linearity Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability Note 1) ±1% F.S. or less (Connected to PF2A3), ±3% F.S. or less (Connected to PF2A2)
Temperature ±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C)
characteristics ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
Output for display unit Analog voltage output (Non-linear) output impedance 1 kΩ output for display unit PF2A3
specification
Output Note 2)
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Weight Note 3) 200 g 240 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1/8, 1/4 3/8 1/2
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A2/PF2A3.
Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting.
Note 3) Without lead wire. (Add 20 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.)
Note 4) Flow rate unit measured under the following conditions: 0°C and 101.3 kPa.
Note 5) The sensor unit is comformed to CE mark.
120
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 121
For Air
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit PF2A3 0 0 A M
Unit specification
Nil With unit switching function
Flow rate range M Fixed SI unit Note)
Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit
Mounting Note) Fixed unit:
A Panel mounting Real-time flow rate: l/min
1 to 10 l/min PF2A510 Accumulated flow: l
0
5 to 50 l/min PF2A550
10 to 100 l/min PF2A511 Output specification
1 20 to 200 l/min PF2A521 Symbol Output specification Applicable model
50 to 500 l/min PF2A551 0 NPN open collector 2 outputs PF2A300/310
1 PNP open collector 2 outputs PF2A301/311
Specifications
Model PF2A300/301 PF2A310/311
Flow rate measurement range Note 1) 0.5 to 10.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Set flow rate range Note 1) 0.5 to 10.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Minimum set unit Note 1) 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange
0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse 2 l/pulse 5 l/pulse
value (Pluse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 2, 3)
Real-time flow rate l/min, CFM x 10–2 l/min, CFM x 10–1
Display unit 3 –1
Accumulated flow l, ft x 10
Accumulated flow range Note 4) 0 to 999999 l
Linearity Note 4) ±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability Note 5) ±1% F.S. or less
±1% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C)
Temperature characteristics
±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
Measuring Instruments
Current consumption 50 mA or less 60 mA or less
Weight 45 g
Sensors
Maximum load current: 80 mA
Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
NPN open collector (PF2A300, PF2A310)
specification
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Note 1) The flow rate measurement range can be modified depending on the setting.
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.)
Note 3) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of 0°C, 101.3 kPa and the standard condition (ANR) of 20°C, 101.3 kPa, and 65% RH.
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 5) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A5.
Note 6) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 7) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2 to
be P_3, 4.)
Note 8) The display unit is comformed to CE mark.
121
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 122
Series PF2A
How to Order
Connectable remote type sensor part is PF2W5--1 (with analog output 1 to 5 V).
Specifications
Model PF2A200/201
Applicable flow rate sensor PF2A510--1 PF2A550--1 PF2A511--1 PF2A521--1 PF2A551--1
Flow rate measurement range Note 1) 0.5 to 10.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Set flow rate range Note 1) 0.5 to 10.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 105 l/min 10 to 210 l/min 25 to 525 l/min
Minimum set unit Note 1) 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange
0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse 2 l/pulse 5 l/pulse
value (Pluse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 2, 3)
Real-time flow rate –2 –1
l/min, CFM x 10 l/min, CFM x 10
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, ft3 x 10–2 l, ft3 x 10–1
Accumulated flow range Note 4) 0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 ft3 x 10–2 0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 ft3 x 10–1
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Current consumption 50 mA or less (Not including the current consumption of the sensor)
Power supply voltage for sensor Same as [Power supply voltage]
Power supply current for sensor Note 3) Max. 110 mA (However, the total current for the 4 inputs is 440 mA maximum or less.)
Sensor input 1 to 5 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 800K Ω)
No. of inputs 4 inputs
Input protection Excess voltage protection
Maximum load current: 80 mA
Switch output
NPN open collector (PF2A200) Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
specification
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (No condensation or freezing)
Operating humidity range Operating or Stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (de-energized)
Impact resistance 980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (de-energized)
Noise resistance 500 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Connection Power supply / Output connection: 8P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector (e-con)
Material Housing: PBT, Display: PET, Backside rubber: CR
Weight 60 g (Except for any accessories that are shipped together)
Note 1) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function. (“-M” is suffixed at the end of part number.) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 2) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of 0°C, 101.3 kPa and the standard condition (ANR) of 20°C, 101.3 kPa, and 65% RH.
Note 3) If Vcc side on sensor input connector part is short-circuited with the 0 V side, the flow monitor inside will be damaged.
Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 5) The system accuracy when combined with an applicable flow sensor.
Note 6) The display unit is comformed to CE mark.
122
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 123
For Air
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A
1.0 3.0 10
2.5
0.8 8
2.0
0.6 6
1.5
0.4 4
1.0
0.2 2
0.5
PF2A721/521 PF2A751/551
50
20
40
Pressure loss (kPa)
15
30
10
20
5 10
0 20 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min)
Measuring Instruments
Sensor Unit Construction
Sensors
PF2A710/750 q w e r w t w e Component Parts
PF2A510/550
No. Description Material
1 Attachment ADC
2 Seal NBR
3 Mesh Stainless steel
4 Body PBT
5 Sensor PBT
Flow direction
PF2A711/721/751 Component Parts
PF2A511/521/551 q w e r t y No. Material
Description
1 Attachment ADC
2 Seal NBR
3 Spacer PBT
4 Mesh Stainless steel
5 Body PBT
6 Sensor PBT
Flow direction
123
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 124
Series PF2A
98 67
82 58 6
60 17 1.6 Brown
1
Load
Main circuit
OUT1
4
Black Load
FLOW SWITCH
UP OUT2
2
White + 12 to
54
44
SET
3 – 24 VDC
OUT1 OUT2
DOWN Blue
FOR AIR
PF2A7--27(-M)
2-Port size 24
4-ø4.5 40 Brown
50 1
OUT1
Main circuit
4
Black Load
(42.2) White
2 OUT2
+ 12 to
Load
– 24 VDC
3
Blue
PF2A7--67(-M)
42
4
2-ø3.4
43
Flow direction
PF2A711/721/751
64
116 23
88 1.6
Connector pin numbers
4 3
FLOW SWITCH
UP
34
54
44
SET
OUT1 OUT2
DOWN
FOR AIR 1 2
Flow direction
124
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 125
For Air
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A
Main circuit
Main circuit
NC 2 White 4 8
Switch + 12 to
Black output – 24 VDC
4 3 7
34
54
44
Blue
3 1 5
PF2A5-
Display unit
4-ø4.5 40 2-Port size 24
Sensor unit (PF2A30/31)
50 Brown
1 2 6
Analog
Main circuit
Main circuit
output
2 Load 4 8
White Switch + 12 to
output – 24 VDC
4 3 7
Black
(44.2)
3 1 5
Blue
Brown
Pulse output + Analog output 52 72 1 2 6
Analog
4
Main circuit
Main circuit
output
2 Load 4 8 + 12 to
White Switch
output – 24 VDC
2-ø3.4 4 3 7
43 Black
Flow direction 3 1 5
Blue
Measuring Instruments
Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter.
PF2A511/521/551 PF2A5--2 (With voltage output type)
Sensors
B
116 23 Wiring
76.2 1.6
Brown (1) DC (+)
Main circuit
34
2 1
(44.2)
3 4
(mm)
Output specifications A B Pin no. Pin description
Pulse output only 48 62 1 DC (+)
Pulse output + Analog output 58 72 2 NC/Analog output
A
3 DC (–)
4 OUT
Flow direction
125
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 126
Series PF2A
Main circuit
Black
3 7 Load
Brown
2 6 +
SMC FLOW SWITCH Blue –
1 5
12 to 24 VDC
35.8
40
A
UNIT
Series
RESET PF2A5 PF2A30-A
SET
OUT2
NC
8 Load
Sensor 4
OUT1
Panel fitting dimensions
Main circuit
3 x 7.2 (= 21.6) Black
3 7 Load
6.4 8-M3 36 +0.5
0 Brown
2 6
+
Blue –
1 5
1 2 3 4
12 to 24 VDC
Series
PF2A5 PF2A31-A
+0.5
0
19.4
1 2 3 4
∗ The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 3.2 mm.
View A
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC 4 to 20 mADC
5 20
Analog output [V]
1 4
Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min] Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min]
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate flow rate value flow rate value flow rate
Basic condition Standard condition Basic condition Standard condition
Part no. Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Part no. Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
measured measured measured measured measured measured measured measured
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value flow rate value
PF2A510--1 1 10 1.1 10.7 PF2A510--2 1 10 1.1 10.7
PF2A550--1 5 50 5.4 53.5 PF2A550--2 5 50 5.4 53.5
PF2A511--1 10 100 11 107 PF2A511--2 10 100 11 107
PF2A521--1 20 200 21 214 PF2A521--2 20 200 21 214
PF2A551--1 50 500 54 535 PF2A551--2 50 500 54 535
126
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 127
For Air
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air (4 Channel Flow Monitor)
PF2A200/201
40.1 (7.5)
40 6 2.5
L/min
L
36.8
OUT1
CH
SMC FLOW
SET
Sensor connector
(option)
42.4
46.4
Measuring Instruments
Panel mounting adapter
Sensors
Front protection cover
55 or more
+0.1
37.5 -0.2
55 or more
Series PF2A
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air (4-channel Flow Monitor)
r
e
w
q
Power supply /
Output connector port Pin no. Terminal Connector no. Cable wire color
q DC+ 1 Brown
w N.C. 2 Not used
e DC– 3 Blue
r IN: 1 to 5 V 4 White
Sensor
+
Load
3 3
+
NC 2 NC 2 24 VDC
1 CH1_OUT1 24 VDC 1 CH1_OUT1
Load
(Black) (Black) –
4 – 4
Load
Sensor
Sensor
3 3
Load
Main circuit
Main circuit
NC 2 CH2_OUT1 NC 2 CH2_OUT1
1 (Gray) 1 (Gray)
Load
Load
4 4
Sensor
Sensor
3 CH3_OUT1 3 CH3_OUT1
NC 2 (Red) NC 2 (Red)
Load
1 1
4 CH4_OUT1 4 CH4_OUT1
Sensor
Sensor
3 (Green) 3 (Green)
Load
NC 2 NC 2
1 DC (–) 1 DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
128
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 129
How to Order
Integrated
display type PF2A7 H M
Flow rate range Unit specification
03 150 to 3000 l/min High flow type With unit
Nil switching function
06 300 to 6000 l/min Port specification Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.)
M Fixed SI unit Note)
12 600 to 12000 l/min Nil Rc Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector
Note) Fixed unit:
N NPT N Without lead wire Real-time flow rate: l/min
F G Accumulated flow: l, m3, m3 x 103
Specifications
Model PF2A703H PF2A706H PF2A712H
Measured fluid Dry air, Nitrogen
Detection type Heater type
Flow rate measuring range Note 1) 150 to 3000 l/min 300 to 6000 l/min 600 to 12000 l/min
Minimum setting unit Note 1) 5 l/min 10 l/min
Measuring Instruments
Note 2) Real-time flow rate l/min, CFM
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, m3, m3 x 103, ft3, ft3 x 103, ft3 x 106
Sensors
Operating pressure range 0.1 to 1.5 MPa
Proof pressure 2.25 MPa
Pressure loss 20 kPa (at maximum flow rate)
Accumulated flow range 0 to 9,999,999,999 l
Linearity Note 3) ±1.5% F.S. or less (0.7 MPa, at 20°C)
Repeatability ±1.0% F.S. or less (0.7 MPa, at 20°C), ±3.0% of F.S. or less in case of analog output
Pressure characteristics ±1.5% F.S. or less (0.1 to 1.5 MPa, based on 0.7 MPa)
Temperature characteristics ±2.0% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
NPN open collector Max. load current: 80 mA; Max. applied voltage: 30 V; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Switch output Note 4)
PNP open collector Max. load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Output Accumulated Note 4) Flow rate per pulse: 100 l/pulse, 10.0 ft3/pulse
NPN or PNP open collector
specification pulse output Pulse width: 50 msec
Output voltage: 1 to 5 V; Load impedance: 100 kΩ or more
Analog output Note 5)
Output current: 4 to 20 mA; Load impedance: 250 Ω or less
Response time 1 sec. or less
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0); Window comparator mode: (can be set from 0 to 3% F.S.)
Power supply voltage 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Current consumption 150 mA or less
Enclosure IP65
Operating temperature range 0 to 50°C (No condensation)
Resistance
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ (500 VDC) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Weight 1.1 kg (Without lead wire) 1.3 kg (Without lead wire) 2.0 kg (Without lead wire)
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 1 11/2 2
Note 1) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of 0°C, 101.3 kPa and the standard condition (ANR) of 20°C, 101.3 kPa, and 65% RH.
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m3 or m3 x 103)] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 3) The high flow rate type is CE marked; however, the linearity with applied noise is ±5% F.S. or less.
Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output selections are made using the button controls.
Note 5) The analog output operates only for real-time flow rate, and does not operate for accumulated flow.
129
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 130
Series PF2A
0 150 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 0 300 1200 2400 3600 4800 6000 0 600 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000
Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min)
Construction
q w e y r t
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note
1 Attachment Aluminum alloy Anodized
2 Seal HNBR —
3 Mesh Stainless steel —
4 Body Aluminum alloy Anodized
5 Sensor PPS —
Flow direction 6 Spacer PBT —
130
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 131
For Air
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A
Dimensions
PFA703H/706H/712H
D Internal circuit and wiring example
E 1 to 4 are terminal numbers.
B F
Accumulated
Brown
1 pulse output
Load ON
Main circuit
OUT1
4 OFF
Black
A
Main circuit
OUT1 ON
4
Black OFF
1 2 Load
Analog output 50 msec
2
White Load +
Connector pin numbers – 24 VDC
3
Blue
Pin no. Pin description Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter, ammeter.
1 DC (+) 68
PF2A7H-- 69 (-M)
2 Analog output
3 DC (–)
4 OUT1 Accumulated pulse output
40 4-I thread with depth J
wiring examples
Max. 30 V
80 mA or less
OUT1
Black Load
H
0V or
Blue
50 msec 50 msec
28
Measuring Instruments
PF2A7H-- 29 (-M)
Sensors
Model A B C D E F G H I J
PF2A703H 55 160 40 92 67 55 Rc 1, NPT 1, G 1 36 M5 x 0.8 8 Brown
50 msec 50 msec
PF2A7H-- 68
69 (-M)
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC 4 to 20 mADC
5 20
Analog output [V]
1 4
Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min] Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min]
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate flow rate value flow rate value flow rate
How to Order
Integrated
display type PF2W7 20 03 27 M
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min Thread type
20 2 to 16 l/min Nil Rc Unit specification
N NPT With unit
40 5 to 40 l/min Nil switching function
11 10 to 100 l/min F G Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.)
M Fixed SI unit Note)
Port size Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector
Note) Fixed unit:
Port Flow rate (l/min) N Without lead wire Real-time flow rate: l/min
Symbol Applicable model Accumulated flow: l
size 4 16 40 100
03 3/8 PF2W704, PF2W720 Output specification
04 1/2 PF2W720, PF2W740 27 NPN open collector 2 outputs
06 3/4 PF2W740, PF2W711 67 PNP open collector 2 outputs
10 1 PF2W711
Specifications
Model PF2W704 PF2W720 PF2W740 PF2W711
Measured fluid Water
Flow rate measurement range 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Set flow rate range 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Flow rate measuring range 0.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 16 l/min 5 to 40 l/min 10 to 100 l/min
Minimum set unit 0.05 l/min 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 50 ms) 0.05 l/pulse 0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse
Operating fluid temperature 0 to 50°C
Sensors Measuring
Linearity ±5% F.S. or less ±3% F.S. or less
Instruments
Repeatability ±3% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less
Temperature characteristics Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less (0° to 50°C, based on 25°C)
Current consumption (No load) 70 mA or less 80 mA or less
Weight Note 2) 460 g 520 g 700 g 1150 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 3/8 3/8, 1/2 1/2, 3/4 3/4, 1
Detection type Karman vortex
Display 3-digit, 7-segment LED
Note 3) l/min, gal (US)/min
Real-time flow rate
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, gal (US)
Operating pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Accumulated flow range Note 4) 0 to 999999 l
Ambient temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –25 to 85°C (No condensation or freezing)
Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Note 5) NPN open collector Maximum applied voltage: 30 V; 2 outputs
Output Switch output
specification Maximum load current: 80 mA
PNP open collector
Internal voltage drop: 1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA); 2 outputs
Accumulated pulse output NPN or PNP open collector (same as switch output)
Indicator light Illuminates when output is ON. OUT1: Green; OUT2: Red
Response time 1 sec. or less
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0), Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Enclosure IP65
Operating temperature range 0 to 50°C
Resistance
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Note 1) In the case of PF2W711, ±3% of F.S. or less (15°C to 35°C, based on 25°C). Note 2) Without lead wire.
Note 3) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF. Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2 to
be P_3, 4.)
Note 7) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark.
132
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 133
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
How to Order
Remote type
Sensor unit PF2W5 20 03 C
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min
40 5 to 40 l/min
11 10 to 100 l/min Option (Refer to page 152.)
Nil None
Thread type C e-con connector x 1 pc.
Nil Rc The cable and connector are shipped
unassembled.
N NPT
F G
Specifications
Measuring Instruments
Flow rate measuring range 0.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 16 l/min 5 to 40 l/min 10 to 100 l/min
Operating pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Sensors
Withstand pressure 1.5 MPa
Operating fluid temperature 0 to 50°C 0 to 50°C
Linearity Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less ±3% F.S. or less
Note 1) ±1% F.S. or less (connected with PF2W33)
Repeatability ±3% F.S. or less
±3% F.S. or less (connected with PF2W2)
Temperature characteristics ±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
Output for Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W3.
specification
display unit (Specifications: Maximum load current of 10mA; Maximum applied voltage of 30 V)
Output Note 2)
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each 4.9 m/s2
Impact resistance 2
490 m/s in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Weight Note 3) 410 g 470 g 650 g 1,100 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 3/8 3/8, 1/2 1/2, 3/4 3/4, 1
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W2/3.
Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting.
Note 3) Without lead wire. (Add 20 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.)
Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark.
133
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 134
Series PF2W
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit PF2W3 0 0 A M
Unit specification
Flow rate range
Nil With unit switching function
Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit Mounting M Fixed SI unit Note)
0.5 to 4 l/min PF2W504 A Panel mounting Note) Fixed unit:
0 2 to 16 l/min PF2W520 Real-time flow rate: l/min
5 to 40 l/min PF2W540 Accumulated flow: l
Specifications
Model PF2W300/301 PF2W330/331
Flow rate measurement range Note 1) 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Set flow rate range Note 1) 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Minimum setting unit Note 1) 0.05 l/min 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange
0.05 l/pulse 0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse
value (Pulse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 2)
Real-time flow rate l/min, gal (US)/min
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, gal (US)
Accumulated flow range Note 3) 0 to 999999 l
Linearity Note 4) ±5% F.S. or less ±3% F.S. or less
Repeatability Note 4) ±3% F.S. or less ±1% F.S. or less
Temperature characteristics ±2% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C), ±1% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C)
Current consumption (No load) 50 mA or less 60 mA or less
Weight 45 g
Maximum load current: 80 mA
Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
NPN open collector (PF2W300, PF2W330)
specification
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Display 3-digit, 7-segment LED
Indicator light Illuminates when output is ON. OUT1: Green; OUT2: Red
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Response time 1 sec. or less
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0) Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
Note 1) Values vary depending on each set flow rate range.
Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.)
Note 3) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 4) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W5.
Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis (H) will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2
to be P_3, 4.)
Note 7) The display unit is comformed to CE mark.
134
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 135
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
How to Order
Connectable remote type sensor part is PF2W5--1 (with analog output 1 to 5 V).
Specifications
Model PF2W200/201
Applicable flow rate sensor PF2W504/504T--1 PF2W520/520T--1 PF2W540/540T--1 PF2W511--1
Flow rate measurement range Note 1) 0.35 to 4.50 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45.0 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Set flow rate range Note 1) 0.35 to 4.50 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45.0 l/min 7 to 110 l/min
Minimum set unit Note 1) 0.05 l/min 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min 1 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange
0.05 l/pulse 0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse 1 l/pulse
value (Pluse width: 50 ms) Note 1)
Note 1)
Real-time flow rate l/min, gal (US)/min
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, gal (US)
Accumulated flow range Note 1) 0 to 999999 l, 0 to 999999 gal (US)
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Current consumption 55 mA or less (Not including the current consumption of the sensor)
Power supply voltage for sensor Same as [Power supply voltage]
Power supply current for sensor Note 3) Max. 110 mA (However, the total current for the 4 inputs is 440 mA maximum or less.)
Measuring Instruments
Sensor input 1 to 5 VDC (Input impedance: Approx: 800 kΩ)
No. of inputs 4 inputs
Sensors
Input protection Excess voltage protection
Maximum load current: 80 mA
Switch output
NPN open collector (PF2W200) Internal voltage drop: 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
(Real-time switch output,
specification
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (No condensation or freezing)
Operating humidity range Operating or Stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each (de-energized)
Impact resistance 980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (de-energized)
Noise resistance 500 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Connection Power supply / Output connection: 8P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector (e-con)
Material Housing: PBT, Display: PET, Backside rubber: CR
Weight 60 g (Except for any accessories that are shipped together)
Note 1) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function. (“-M” is suffixed at the end of part number.) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 2) If Vcc side on sensor input connector part is short-circuited with 0 V side, the flow monitor inside will be damaged.
Note 3) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 4)The system accuracy when combined with applicable flow sensor.
Note 5) The display unit is comformed to CE mark.
135
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 136
Series PF2W
0.020 0.05
0.03
0.04
0.015
0.02 0.03
0.010
0.02
0.01
0.005 0.01
PF2W711/511
0.035
0.030
0.025
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.005
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110
Flow rate (l/min)
q w e w r
Component Parts
No. Description Material
1 Attachment Stainless steel
2 Seal NBR
3 Body PPS
4 Sensor PPS
Flow direction
136
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 137
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
Main circuit
OUT1
FLOW SWITCH 4 Load
UP Black
OUT2
54
44
34
SET 2 +
OUT1 OUT2 White
DOWN –
FOR WATER 3
Blue 12 to
24 VDC
PF2W7--27(-M): NPN type
4-ø4.5 40 2-Port size
50
Brown
1
(42.2) OUT1
4
Main circuit
Black Load
White
2 OUT2 +
Load –
3
Blue 12 to
73
24 VDC
PF2W7--67(-M): PNP type
42
4
Model L dimension 1 2
PF2W704 100
PF2W720 106 Pin no. Pin description
1 DC (+)
Measuring Instruments
PF2W740 2 OUT2
3 DC (–)
Sensors
120 67 6 4 OUT1
60 17 1.6
FLOW SWITCH
UP
34
55
60
50
34
SET
OUT1 OUT2
DOWN
FOR WATER
(42.2)
73
34
Flow direction
137
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 138
Series PF2W
PF2W711
148 77
80 79
32 9 2
FLOW SWITCH UP
70
58
46
45
SET
OUT1 OUT2 DOWN
46 60 (42.2)
88
Flow direction
138
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 139
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
Main circuit
Main circuit
NC 2 White 4 8
Switch +
Black output –
34
54
44
4 3 7
Blue
3 1 5
PF2W5-
4-ø4.5 40 2-Port size 6
50
Display unit
Sensor unit (PF2W30/31)
Brown 12 to 24 VDC
1 2 6
Analog
Main circuit
Main circuit
(44.2)
output
2 Load 4 8
White Switch +
output –
4 3 7
Black
3 1 5
Blue
Main circuit
output
2 Load 4 8
White Switch +
output –
Measuring Instruments
Model L dimension 4 3 7
Black
PF2W504 100
PF2W520 106 3 1 5
Sensors
Blue
34
55
3 4
Output specification A B
Output for display 42 62 Pin no. Pin description
A
unit only
1 DC (+)
Output for display unit +
Analog output 52 72 2 NC/Analog output
3 DC (–)
Flow direction 4 OUT
139
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 140
Series PF2W
PF2W511-(N)-
B
148 32
80
70
58
46
45
4-ø5.5 36 2-Port size 45 2
(44.2)
Output specification A B
Output for display 63 77
A
unit only
Output for display unit +
Analog output 73 87
Flow direction
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC 4 to 20 mADC
5 20
Analog output [V]
1 4
0 0
Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min] Min. measured Max. measured Real-time [l/min]
flow rate value flow rate value flow rate flow rate value flow rate value flow rate
Minimum measured Maximum measured Minimum measured Maximum measured
Part no. Part no.
flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min]
PF2W504--1 0.5 4 PF2W504--2 0.5 4
PF2W520--1 2 16 PF2W520--2 2 16
PF2W540--1 5 40 PF2W540--2 5 40
PF2W511--1 10 100 PF2W511--2 10 100
140
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 141
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
PF2W3-A
Panel mounting type Internal circuit and wiring example
1 2 to 8 are terminal numbers.
OUT2
NC
8 Load
41.8 40.3 Sensor 4
40 4.3 OUT1
Main circuit
Black
3 7 Load
Brown
2 6
+
SMC FLOW SWITCH
Blue –
1 5
35.8
12 to 24 VDC
40
A
UNIT
Series
RESET
Main circuit
1 2 3 4
Black
3 7 Load
+0.5
0
Brown
19.4
2 6
36
+
Blue –
1 5
5 6 7 8 12 to 24 VDC
Series
PF2W5 PF2W31-A
View A ∗ The applicable panel thickness is 1 to 3.2 mm. ∗ Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to 3 .
Measuring Instruments
Terminal block number
1 2 3 4
Sensors
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
141
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 142
Series PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water (4-channel Flow Monitor)
PF2W200/201
40.1 (7.5)
40 6 2.5
L/min
L
36.8
OUT1
CH
SMC FLOW
SET
Sensor connector
(option)
42.4
46.4
55 or more
+0.1
37.5 -0.2
55 or more
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water (4-channel Flow Monitor)
Power supply /
Output connector port Pin no. Terminal Connector no. Cable wire color
q DC+ 1 Brown
w N.C. 2 Not used
e DC– 3 Blue
r IN: 1 to 5 V 4 White
Measuring Instruments
Sensors
Internal circuits and wiring example
PF2W200 PF2W201
DC (+) DC (+)
4 4
(Brown) (Brown)
Sensor
+
Load
3 3
+
NC 2 NC 2 24 VDC
1 CH1_OUT1 24 VDC 1 CH1_OUT1
Load
(Black) (Black) –
4 – 4
Load
Sensor
3 3
Load
Main circuit
Main circuit
NC 2 CH2_OUT1 NC 2 CH2_OUT1
1 (Gray) 1 (Gray)
Load
Load
4 4
Sensor
3 CH3_OUT1 3 CH3_OUT1
NC 2 (Red) NC 2 (Red)
Load
1 1
4 CH4_OUT1 4 CH4_OUT1
Sensor
3 (Green) 3 (Green)
Load
NC 2 NC 2
1 DC (–) 1 DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
143
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 144
How to Order
Integrated
display type PF2W7 20 T 03 27
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min Temperature range
20 2 to 16 l/min T 0 to 90°C Unit specification
40 5 to 40 l/min With unit
Wiring specification (Refer to page 152.) Nil switching function
Thread type Nil M12 3 m lead wire with connector M Fixed SI unit Note 2)
Port size
Nil Rc N Without lead wire Note) Fixed unit:
Flow rate (l/min)
N NPT Symbol Port Applicable model Real-time flow rate: l/min
size 4 16 40 Output specification Accumulated flow: l
F G
03 3/8 PF2W704T, PF2W720T 27 PNP open collector 2 outputs
04 1/2 PF2W720T, PF2W740T 67 NPN open collector 2 outputs
06 3/4 PF2W740T
Specifications
Model PF2W704T PF2W720T PF2W740T
Measured fluid Water, Mixture of water (50%) and ethylene glycol (50%)
Flow rate measurement range 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min
Set flow rate range 0.35 to 4.5 l/min 1.7 to 17.0 l/min 3.5 to 45 l/min
Flow rate measuring range 0.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 16 l/min 5 to 40 l/min
Minimum setting unit 0.05 l/min 0.1 l/min 0.5 l/min
Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 50 ms) 0.05 l/pulse 0.1 l/pulse 0.5 l/pulse
Operating fluid temperature 0 to 90°C (With no cavitation)
Linearity ±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability ±3% F.S. or less
Temperature characteristics Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less (0 to 90°C, based on 25°C)
Current consumption (No load) 70 mA or less
Weight Note 2) 710 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 3/8 3/8, 1/2 1/2, 3/4
Detection type Karman vortex
Display 3-digit, 7-segment LED
Note 3) Real-time flow rate l/min, gal (US)/min
Display unit
Accumulated flow l, gal (US)
Operating pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Withstand pressure 1.5 MPa
Accumulated flow range Note 4) 0 to 999999 l
specification
NPN open collector 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA) Maximum applied voltage: 30 V; 2 outputs
Switch output
PNP open collector Maximum load current: 80 mA; Internal voltage drop:
1.5 V or less (With load current of 80 mA); 2 outputs
Accumulated pulse output NPN or PNP open collector (Same as switch output)
Indicator light Illuminates when output is ON. OUT1: Green; OUT2: Red
Response time 1 sec. or less
Hysteresis Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from 0); Window comparator mode: 3-digit fixed Note 6)
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Enclosure IP65
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –25 to 85°C (No condensation or freezing)
Resistance
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C, based on 25°C) Note 2) Without lead wire.
Note 3) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.)
Note 4) Accumulated flow rate is reset when the power supply turns OFF.
Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting.
Note 6) Window comparator mode — Since hysteresis will reach 3 digits, keep P_1 and P_2 or n_1 and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_1, 2 to be n_3, 4 and P_1, 2 to
be P_3, 4.)
Note 7) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark.
144
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 145
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
How to Order
Remote type
Display unit PF2W5 20 T 03 C
Flow rate range
04 0.5 to 4 l/min
20 2 to 16 l/min Temperature range
40 5 to 40 l/min T 0 to 90°C
Option (Refer to page 152.)
Nil None
Thread type
C e-con connector x 1 pc.
Nil Rc
The cable and connector are shipped
N NPT unassembled.
F G
Measuring Instruments
Linearity Note 1) ±5% F.S. or less
Repeatability Note 1) ±2% F.S. or less
Sensors
Temperature characteristics ±2% F.S. or less (15 to 35°C based on 25°C), ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C based on 25°C)
Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W3.
Output for display unit
specification
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between external terminal and case
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more (500 VDC Mega) between external terminal and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller: 1.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s2 acceleration in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Impact resistance 490 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µs, Rise time 1 ns
Weight Note 3) 660 g
Port size (Rc, NPT, G) 3/8 3/8, 1/2 1/2, 3/4
Note 1) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W3/3.
Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting.
Note 3) Without lead wire. (Add 20 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.)
Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark.
Display units are the same as those of remote type digital flow switch for water (series PF2W3/
PF2W20). Refer to page 134, 135 for details.
145
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 146
Series PF2W
0.04 0.06
0.020 0.05
0.03
0.04
0.015
0.02 0.03
0.010
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.01
q w e w r
Component Parts
No. Description Material
1 Attachment Stainless steel
2 Seal FKM
3 Body PPS
4 Sensor PPS
Flow direction
146
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 147
For Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2W
Main circuit
OUT1
4 Load
Black
OUT2
FLOW SWITCH 2
UP White + 12 to
3 – 24 VDC
SET
60
50
34
Blue
OUT1 OUT2
DOWN PF2W7T--27(-M)
FOR WATER
Brown
1
OUT1
4
Main circuit
4-ø4.5 40 2-Port size 34 Black Load
50 White
2 OUT2
+ 12 to
(42.2) Load – 24 VDC
3
Blue
PF2W7T--67-M)
34
1 2
Measuring Instruments
4 OUT1
Sensors
147
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 148
Series PF2W
PF2W504T/520T/540T-(N)
B
120 23
Internal circuit and wiring example
1 2 to 8 are terminal numbers.
60 1.6
Display unit
Sensor unit (PF2W30/31)
Brown 12 to 24 VDC
1 2 6
Main circuit
Main circuit
NC 2 White 4 8
Switch +
60
50
34
Black output
4 3 7 –
Blue
3 1 5
PF2W5T-
4-ø4.5 40 2-Port size 34
50
Display unit
Sensor unit (PF2W30/31)
Brown 12 to 24 VDC
1 2 6
Analog
Main circuit
Main circuit
output
2 Load 4 8
White Switch +
output
(44.2)
4 3 7 –
Black
3 1 5
Blue
Main circuit
output
2 Load 4 8
White Switch +
output
Flow direction 4 3 7 –
Black
3 1 5
Blue
Analog output
1 to 5 VDC 4 to 20 mADC Load is an analog input equipment such as a voltmeter.
PF2W5T--2 (With voltage output type)
Wiring
5 20
Analog output [V]
1 2
For Air/Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A/PF2W
e
SET
e UNIT
SET
DOWN
u
u t
r y
RESET button ( + button)
If the UP and DOWN buttons are pressed simultaneously, the RESET function will activate.
In case of an emergency, please clear the display. The display of the accumulated flow will be
reset to zero.
q LED display/Red Displays the measured flow rate, each setting condition, and error code.
Indicator
w (PF2A7, PF2A3 for Illuminates when the normal condition (nor) is selected.
air only)
e Output (OUT1) display/Green Displays the output condition of OUT1. Illuminates when turned ON.
r Output (OUT2) display/Red Displays the output condition of OUT2. Illuminates when turned ON.
t UP button ( button) Use to change the mode or to increase the set value.
y SET button ( button) Use this button to set the valve or the set mode.
u DOWN button ( button) Use to change the mode or decrease the set value.
Measuring Instruments
q r reset to zero.
q LCD display/Orange Displays the measured flow rate, each setting condition, and error code.
e
Sensors
w Output (OUT1) display/Orange Displays the output condition of OUT1. Illuminates when turned ON.
i
w e Unit display/Orange
Displays the selected unit. Type without unit switching function is
fixed SI units (l/min, or l, m3, m3 x 103).
Flow rate confirmation
t u r display/Orange The blinking intervals change depending on the flow rate value.
UP S E T MODE DOWN
t UP button ( button) Use to change the mode or to increase the set value.
w
L/min
L w Switch output display/Red Displays the output condition of OUT1 (CH1 to 4). Illuminates when turned ON.
e OUT1 t Unit display of flow rate for air/ CH1 to 4 will illuminate when the normal condition (nor) is
e Red (PF2A200, 201 for air only) selected.
CH
y r Unit display/Orange
Illuminates the selected unit. Use after putting the unit label other
SET
i than l/min, l.
t Channel display/Red Displays the selected channel.
u y UP button ( button) Use to change the mode or to increase the set value.
u SET button Use this button to set the value or the set mode.
i DOWN button ( button) Use to change the mode or decrease the set value.
149
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 150
Series PF2A/PF2W
OFF
OUT1 Output
mode 50 msec
ON
“n” OFF
Note 2)
Note 1) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l, m3 or m3
x 103] will be set for switch types without unit switching function.)
Refer to the specifications of display unit for the flow rate value per pulse.
150
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 151
For Air/Water
Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A/PF2W
Copy function (PF2200, 201 only) Channel select function (PF2200, 201 only)
Information to be copied is: Every pushing the button, channel selection
q Flow rate range “12341...” is available. The flow rate measure-
w Display mode ment of each selected channel is shown in the display
e Display unit (Only available when the unit specification unit.
is nil.)
r Output method
t Output mode Channel scan function (PF2200, 201 only)
y Flow rate display unit (available with PF2A20 only) Changes displaying the channel shown every about 2
u Flow rate value seconds and its detected flow rate.
Error correction
LED display Contents Solution
Note 2)
The set data has Perform the RESET
changed for some operation, and reset all
Note 1) reason. the data again.
Measuring Instruments
Note 1)
The flow rate is over the Use an adjustment valve, etc.
flow rate measurement to reduce the flow rate until it
Sensors
Note 2) range. is within the flow rate range.
Note 1) Applicable to display integrated type and remote type except
PF2A7H series.
Note 2) Applicable to PF2A7H series only.
151
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 152
Series PF2A/PF2W
Option
When only optional parts are required, order with the part numbers listed below.
U
P
SE
T
DO
WN
e-con connector
PF2A20
M12 lead wire PF2W20
with connector
PF2A5
PF2W5 (T)
In addition to the lead wire assembly shown above, those listed below (female contact) can In addition to the connectors shown above, those listed below (e-con) can be
be connected. connected.
However, they cannot be connected with an e-con connector because the diameter of the
core wire and its coverage diameter are different. For details, contact each manufacturer. Manufacturer Model
Connector size Pin no. Manufacturer Applicable series Sumitomo 3M Limited 37104-3122-000FL
Correns Corp. VA-4D Tyco Electronics AMP K.K. 2-1473562-4
OMRON Corp. XS2 OMRON Corp. XN2A-1430
M12 4 Yamatake Co.,Ltd. PA5-4I
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. HR24
DKK Ltd. CM01-8DP4S
Panel mounting
Pin no. Description Note Part no. Description Note
ZS-22-E Panel mounting adapter A, B With mounting bracket ZS-26-B Panel mounting adapter With waterproof seal, mounting screw
ZS-26-C Front protective cover + Panel mounting adapter With waterproof seal, mounting screw
Panel PF2A3
PF2W3 Front protective cover
152
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 153
Related Product:
Multi Counter
Series CEU5
How to Order
CEU5
Power supply voltage A COM B COM DC12V GND F.G. R.S. HOLD COM BANK1 BANK2
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5 UP
Nil 100 to 240 VAC COUNT PRESET FUNC.
Output transistor mode D 24 VDC
LEFT RIGHT
DOWN
Nil NPN open collector output
MODE SEL.
P PNP open collector output SET
Connection Method
Measuring Instruments
Sensors
A COM B COM DC12V GND F.G. R.S. HOLD COM BANK1 BANK2
MULTI COUNTER:CEU5 UP
COUNT PRESET FUNC.
LEFT RIGHT
DOWN BCD
• Possible to measure accumulated pulse output of a Digital Flow Switch by an unit of 100 l (litter) and 10 ft3 (cube foot) using the
pre-scaling function* of the multi counter (When inputting to the multi counter, Up or Down is selected as input method.)
• Possible to take advantage of all CEU5 functions using preset mode and function mode.
* The set value is calculated by selecting manual mode. By multiplication by 4, then, per pulse value is set.
Caution
When connecting the CEU5 with an encoder from another manufacturer, please thoroughly confirm the specification beforehand.
Please note that the CEU5 may not count normally depending on the output method, output frequency and connecting cable
length, etc. of the encoders.
Regarding connection with scale cylinder, refer to “Stroke reading cylinders & Counters CE series” in the Best Pneumatics Vol. 10.
153
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 154
2-color digital display allows you to choose the setting
according to your application requirements.
4 different display settings are available.
Abnormal conditions can be detected at a glance!
PRESSURE kPa PRESSURE kPa PRESSURE kPa PRESSURE kPa PRESSURE kPa
17.8 mm 12.4 mm
32.2 34.8
KQ2H06-M5 KQ2L06-M5
∗ Comparison when One-touch fittings (KQ2H06-M5 / KQ2L06-M5) are connected to the piping ports (M5 x 0.8)
154
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 155
Space saving improvement
Space saving improvement
Before
ZSE4E Display calibration
ISE4E Each displa
y required
its own pa
nel openin Before
g.
40
126
After
Measuring Instruments
simple to operate,
103.5 soft to the touch.
Sensors
Compact p
rofile Plug-type
connectors take the
burden out of
wiring work and
maintenance.
With analog output
Applicable panel In addition to the conventional voltage output High precision
thickness is up to 6 mm type (1 to 5 V)
resolution: 1/1000
(Panel mounting) Current output type
(4 to 20 mA) is now available.
• Convenient when longer wiring is required Variations
• Excellent noise resistance
Vacuum/Low pressure Positive pressure
ZSE30 ISE30
Switches for vacuum and positive 100 kPa 1 MPa
155
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 156
Series ZSE30/ISE30
How to Order
Option 1
Without lead wire
Nil
NPT 1/8
T1 A
(With M5 female thread)
C4H
ø4 One-touch fitting Straight type
ø5/32" One-touch fiting
Output specification Panel mount
C6H ø6 One-touch fitting 25 NPN output
65 PNP output
26 1 to 5 V output B
N7H ø1/4" One-touch fitting
28 4 to 20 mA output
C4L
ø4 One-touch fitting Elbow type
ø5/32" One-touch fitting
Panel mount adapter +
Front protective
C6L ø6 One-touch fitting cover
D
N7L ø1/4" One-touch fitting
156
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 157
Specifications
ZSE30 (Vacuum/Low pressure) ISE30 (Positive pressure)
Rated pressure range –100.0 to 100.0 kPa 0.000 to 1.000 MPa
Set pressure range –101.0 to 101.0 kPa –0.100 to 1.000 MPa
Withstand pressure 500 kPa 1.5 MPa
Min. regulating unit 0.2 kPa 0.001 MPa
Fluid Air, Inert gas, Non-flammable gas
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption 45 mA or less (at no load)
Switch output Note 1) NPN or PNP open collector output: 1 output
Max. load current 80 mA
Max. applied voltage 30 V (With NPN output)
Residual voltage 1 V or less (With load current of 80 mA)
Response time 2.5 ms or less (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 20, 160, 640, 1280 ms)
Short circuit protection Yes
Repeatability ±0.2% F.S. ±2 digit or less ±0.2% F.S. ±1 digit or less
Note 2) Output voltage: 1 to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range)
Voltage output
Linearity: ±1% F.S. or less, Output impedance: Approx. 1 kΩ
Analog Output current: 4 to 20 mA ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range)
output Note 3) Linearity: ±1% F.S. or less
Current output Maximum load impedance: 300 Ω with power supply voltage of 12 V;
600 Ω with power supply voltage of 24 V
Minimum load impedance: 50 Ω
Hysteresis mode
Hysteresis Adjustable (can be set from 0)
Window comparator mode
3 1/2 digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (Red and green)
Display Sampling cycle: 5 times/s
±2% F.S. ±2 digit ±2% F.S. ±1 digit
Display accuracy
(at 25°C ambient temperature) (at 25°C ambient temperature)
Indicator light Illuminates when output is ON. (Green)
Temperature characteristics ±2% F.S. or less (based on 25°C)
Enclosure IP40
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (No freezing or condensation)
Environmental
Measuring Instruments
Operating humidity range Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
resistance
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between live parts and enclosure
Sensors
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 500 VDC)
Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.5 mm or 20 m/s2 amplitude in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hours each
Impact resistance 100 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
Standard Compliant with CE Marking and UL (CSA) standards
Note 1) When switch output is selected, analog output is not available.
Note 2) When voltage output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and current output is not available.
Note 3) When current output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and voltage output is not available.
Piping Specifications
Function
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the conditions of the measured fluid.
Anti-chattering function Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time.
Key lock function The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch.
Peak hold function Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Bottom hold function Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Zero out function The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere.
Unit conversion (for overseas use) Note 2) Can convert the display value (for overseas use only).
157
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 158
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Unit Descriptions
Black OUT
pressure. Minimum load impedance: 50 Ω + 12
(Analog output)
to
– 24 VDC
Load
Internal data error
Blue DC(–)
Shut off the power
supply. Turn the -65
Internal data error
power supply back PNP open collector
System on. Maximum 80 mA
error If the power should Brown DC(+)
not come back on,
Internal data error
Main circuit
Blue DC(–)
158
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 159
Dimensions
PRESSURE MPa
M5 x 0.8
20 ± 0.1
10
SMC
OUT
Wi
SET
dth
ac
ros
1.5 sf
01: R1/8 lat
s1
T1: NPT1/8 2
A A
(mm)
One-touch fitting Straight Elbow
size A B A B C
C
Straight Elbow
With One-touch fitting
Measuring Instruments
With bracket
Sensors
42.5
10
15
4.2
3
22
30
20 25
20
SMC
45
30
1.8
35 35
159
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 160
Series ZSE30/ISE30
Dimensions
Panel mount
34.5 47.8
PRESSURE MPa R4
.5 .5
R4
21
OUT
SET MADE IN JAPAN
8.75
Panel thickness 0.5 to 6
34.5
160
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 161
Dimensions
SET SET SET
Measuring Instruments
Sensors
Multiple (2 pcs. or more) vertical mounting
0
31–0.4 24 and up
PRESSURE MPa
OUT
31 x n pcs. + 3.5 x (n pcs. – 1)
SET MADE IN JAPAN
PRESSURE MPa
OUT
SET MADE IN JAPAN
PRESSURE MPa
OUT
SET MADE IN JAPAN
161
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 162
High precision and high resolution
Vacuum pressure 1/1000 (0.1 kPa)
Compound pressure 11/2000 (0.1 kPa)
Positive pressure 1/1000 (0.001 MPa)
High speed response:
→
Pressure
Momentary change
2.5 ms or less
With anti-chattering function P1
Stable switch output is possible even with sudden Set value P2
(Operating principle)
At the point when the primary pressure fluctuates, the set Switch output ON Does not turn OFF
pressure value is compensated by setting the auto shift input 1, 2 Does not turn ON
OFF
(external input) to low (no-voltage) input, using the pressure
Time →
measured at that point as a standard.
When using auto shift
Set value Set value
compensation compensation
→
5 ms or more
10 ms
or less
[Switch
when auto shift is input. ]
output response time
Hi
Auto shift
input Lo
Time →
Repeatability IP65 compatible
±0.2% F.S. ±1 digit or less Dusttight/Splash proof type
162
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 163
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch Series ZSE40/ISE40
How to Order
Piping specification A
01: R 1/8 (With M5 female threads) W1 : Rc 1/8
T1: NPT 1/8 (With M5 female threads) ∗ WF1: G 1/8
Reverse pressure two directions
R 1/8, NPT 1/8 Bracket B (ZS-24-B)
Rc 1/8, G 1/8
M5 x 0.8
female threads B
Rc 1/8, G 1/8
Bracket D (ZS-24-D)
∗ C4: With ø4 One-touch fitting ∗ M5: M5 x 0.8 (Female threads) D Refer to the dimensions.
∗ C6: With ø6 One-touch fitting
Wall mount Wall mount
Measuring Instruments
Panel mount (ZS-22-A)
Sensors
M5 x 0.8 E
ø4, ø6
One-touch fitting
∗ Option
Panel mount (ZS-24-C)
Piping specification/Options + Front protective cover
Piping specifications
Description Symbol 01 T1 W1 WF1 C4 C6 M5
Bracket A A F
Bracket B B
Bracket D D
Panel mount E
Panel mount + Front protective cover F ∗ When optional parts only are required,
: Available : Not available order with the part numbers inside ( ).
Note
When equipped with auto shift function, the following ranges can be set.
Set pressure range Setting range
–100.0 to 100.0 kPa –100.0 to 100.0 kPa Lead wire length
10.0 to –101.3 kPa –101.3 to 101.3 kPa Nil 0.6 m
–0.1 to 1.000 MPa –1.000 to 1.000 MPa L 3m
163
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 164
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Specifications
Functions
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the condi-
tions of the measured fluid.
Auto shift function Note 1) Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuations in the primary pressure.
Anti-chattering function Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time.
Key lock function The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch.
Peak hold function Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Bottom hold function Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Zero out function The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere.
Unit conversion (for overseas use) Note 2) Can convert the display value (for overseas use only).
Note 1) Select and order by specifying the types and models.
164
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 165
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch Series ZSE40/ISE40
Setting
Calibration procedure
Calibration Procedure
3 1/2-digit LED
Displays present pressure. kPa
Displays each mode.
Measuring Instruments
Displays error mode.
LED (Red)
LED (Green)
Sensors
Displays OUT2 output condition.
Displays OUT1 output condition. OUT1 OUT2
When it is ON, the LED is
When it is ON, the LED is SET illuminated.
illuminated.
DOWN button
UP button
Switches the mode and set value.
Switching of the mode and set value
SET button
Switches to each mode and fixes
the set value.
165
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 166
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Output Method
ON
Output
OUT1
mode
ON
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-22(L)-(M) ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-30(L)-(M)
With analog output With auto shift input
DC (+) DC (+)
(Brown) (Brown)
1.2 kΩ
Main circuit
Main circuit
Load
1 kΩ (Gray) (Gray)
6.8 kΩ
Load
Load
ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-62(L)-(M) ZSE40(F)/ISE40-
-70(L)-(M)
With analog output With auto shift input
DC (+) DC (+)
(Brown) (Brown)
1.2 kΩ
Main circuit
Main circuit
Load
(White) (White)
Load
Load
DC (–) DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
166
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 167
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch Series ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– 01
T1
30 20
M5 x 0.8 thread depth 5
MPa
30
20
OUT1 OUT2
SET
ats
12 ss fl
6.4 2-M3 x 0.5 thread depth 4
ro
18.35
ac
Atmospheric
dth
release port
Wi
600 (3000)
Lead wire
ength
ø3.5
.4
7.8
12
2.5
2.6
30
15.2
10.7
4.5
14
1.5
01: R 1/8
T1: NPT 1/8
Bracket A
Measuring Instruments
A
30 2-M3 x 5L View A
Sensors
45
55
4.5
11.5
40
15
1.6
4.5
20
6.5
(26.7)
Bracket D
A
30 2-M3 x 5L View A
45
55
11.5
40
15
1.6
4.2
22
7.2
35 (26.7)
167
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 168
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– W1
WF1
2-M4 x 0.7 20
30 thread depth 4
W1: Rc 1/8
WF1: G 1/8
MPa
20
30
OUT1 OUT2
SET
19
5
6.
R
6.4
18.35
Atmospheric
release port
600 (3000)
Lead wire
length
ø3.5
.4
12
7.8
7
2.5
2.6
30
42
15.2
10.7
4
6
12 W1: Rc 1/8
WF1: G 1/8
Bracket A
A
30
View A
2-M4 x 5L 49
55
40
4.5
11.5
1.6
15
4.5
20
(30.7) 6.5
Bracket B
A
30 v
2-M4 x 5L
46.1
45
30
1.6
12.1
4.5
4.5
5
4.
6.5
168
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 169
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch Series ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
Bracket D A
30
View A
2-M4 x 5L
49
55
40
11.5
1.6
15
4.2
22
(30.7) 7.2
35
C4
ZSE40(F)/ISE40– C6
M5
32.3
5
30 4. 12.8
20 2-
8
28.15
22.15
MPa
44.3
30
Measuring Instruments
OUT1 OUT2
SET
19
25.4
Sensors
6.4
18.35
Atmospheric
release port
600 (3000)
length
Lead
wire
ø3.5
2.5
2.6
30
15.2
43
10.7
8.5
7
12
One-touch fitting ø4, ø6 M5 x 0.8 thread depth 5
169
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 170
Series ZSE40/ISE40
Dimensions
+0.5
0
36
OUT1 OUT2
SET
70 or more
The thickness of the panel is 1 to 3.2 mm.
OUT1 OUT2
SET
170
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 171
LCD Display
(For vacuum) (For positive pressure)
Digital Pressure Switch
Series ZSE3/ISE3
Air Line
Maintenance
Specifications
Measuring Instruments
Response frequency 200 Hz
Note 3) Hysteresis mode Variable (3 digits or more)
Hysteresis
Sensors
Window comparator mode Fixed (3 digits)
Fluid Air, Non-corrosive gas
Temperature characteristics ±3% F.S. or less
Repeatability ±1% F.S. or less
Operating voltage 12 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±10% or less)
Output specification NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
Current consumption 25 mA or less
Error display Indicator light: Red light blinks, Error code displayed on LCD
Pressure display 3 1/2 digit LCD (5mm-size numerals)
Self-diagnostic function Overcurrent , Excess pressure, Data error, Pressure at zero clear
Operating temperature range 0 to 60°C (with no condensation)
Noise resistance 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width 1 µS, Rise time 1 nS
Withstand voltage 1000 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between external terminals and case
Insulation resistance 2 MΩ (500 VDC) between external terminals and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz at whichever is smaller, amplitude 1.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s2, in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hrs. each
Shock resistance 980 m/s2 in X,Y,Z directions 3 times each
Connector type Heat resistant vinyl cord ø1.55, 0.31 mm2, 4-wire
Lead wire
Grommet type Oilproof heavy-duty vinyl cord -21, –23: ø3.5, 0.14 mm2, 4 cores –22, –24: ø3.5, 0.15 mm2, 5 cores
Weight 40 g (with 0.6 m lead wire)
R 1/8, M5 x 0.8, NPTF 1/8, M5 x 0.8
Port size ZX ejector mounted type: M5 x 0.8
R 1/8, M5 x 0.8, NPTF 1/8, M5 x 0.8
Enclosure IP40
Note 1) For vacuum operation, a momentary pressure of 0.5 MPa will not be a problem.
Note 2) For ZSE3-- 23 24 , the red light will be ON for failure detection output.
Note 3) Hysteresis mode:
When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2 is within 3 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 3 digits for the set value of P1.
Window comparator mode:
Since the hysteresis is 3 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 7 digits or more when setting.
1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above.)
171
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 172
Series ZSE3/ISE3
How to Order
Output specification
NPN open collector 2 outputs
21
Without analog output
NPN open collector 2 outputs
22
With analog output (1 to 5 V)
Positive
Pressure ISE3
Vacuum ZSE3
Wiring specification
Nil Grommet type lead wire length 0.6 m
L Grommet type lead wire length 3 m
C Connector type lead wire length 0.6 m
CL Connector type lead wire length 3 m
CN Without connector
Only grommet type available for analog output.
172
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 173
Air Line
Maintenance
Pressure detection for
a wide range of fluids
Argon
Air containing drain
Ammonia
Freon
Hydraulic fluid ( JIS-K2213 ) Carbon dioxide
Silicon oil ( JIS-K2213 ) Nitrogen
To measure low-quality air,
Lubricating oil (JIS-K6301) containing drain
Leakage test with nitrogen
Fluoro carbon
To confirm absorption of workpiece with water
on the surface, e.g. wet LCD glass plate
To measure hydraulic pressure
Measuring Instruments
Leakage is kept at the lowest level by using VCR®
and Swedgelok® fittings.
Sensors
ZSE50F / ISE50 1 x 10-5 Pa⋅m3/s
ZSE60F / ISE60 1 x 10-10 Pa⋅m3/s
Enclosure IP65
Option
173
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 174
Series ZSE50/ISE50
High precision and high resolution
Compound pressure 1/2000 ( 0.1 kPa )
Positive pressure 1/1000 ( 0.001MPa )
Repeatability 0.2% F.S. 1 digit or less
174
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 175
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50
How to Order
Piping specification
Option
02 R 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
Nil None
T2 NPT 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
Bracket A
G2 ∗ G 1/4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction
∗ Option
A
Input/Output specification
22 NPN open collector 2 output + Analog output Bracket D
30 NPN open collector 2 output + Auto shift input Refer to the dimensions for
62 ∗ PNP open collector 2 output + Analog output D the difference between
70 ∗ PNP open collector 2 output + Auto shift input brackets A and D.
∗ Option
Note) Auto shift input is used for the auto shift function. Panel mount
For more information, please refer to “Auto Shift Function” on
page 178.
E
Lead wire length
L 3m
Measuring Instruments
Panel mount +
Analog Output Front protection cover
Sensors
Suitable model: ZSE50F/ISE50-
-22/62(L)-(M)
Series ISE50 Series ZSE50F
F
Analog output value (V)
5 5
1 1
0
1.0 MPa –100 kPa 100 kPa Unit specification
Nil With unit switching function
Pressure Pressure M Fixed SI unit Note)
175
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 176
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Specifications
Function
Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the
conditions of the measured fluid.
Auto shift function Note 1) Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuations in the primary pressure.
Anti-chattering function Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time.
Key lock function The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch.
Peak hold function Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Bottom hold function Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement.
Zero out function The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere.
Unit conversion (for overseas use) Note 1) Can convert the display value (for overseas use only).
Note 1) Select and order by specifying the types and models.
176
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 177
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Output Method
ON
Output
OUT1
mode
ON
∗ Same with OUT2.
YES • Hysteresis mode
OFF
n-2 n-1
High pressure (for positive pressure/
compound pressure)
Measuring Instruments
Example of Internal Circuit and Wiring
Sensors
ZSE 50 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-22(L)-(M) ZSE 50 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-30(L)-(M)
With analog output With auto shift input
DC (+) DC (+)
(Brown) (Brown)
1.2 kΩ
Main circuit
Main circuit
Load
1 kΩ (Gray) (Gray)
6.8 kΩ
Load
Load
ZSE 50 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-62(L)-(M) ZSE 50 50
60 F/ISE 60 -
-70(L)-(M)
With analog output With auto shift input
DC (+) DC (+)
(Brown) (Brown)
1.2 kΩ
Main circuit
Main circuit
Load
(White) (White)
Load
Load
DC (–) DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
177
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 178
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
P1
P2
possible set range, the correction value is not saved. The dis-
play will show “ ” if the set point value is above the upper lim-
it and “ ” if it is below the lower limit.
Time • The correction value “ ” set by auto shift input disappears
ON when the power is turned off.
Switch output 1, 2
OFF • The correction value “ ” for the auto shift function is reset to
zero (the initial value) when the power is turned on again.
P1
P2
ISE50-- 30
70
ISE60-- 30
70
–1.0000 to 1.000 MPa
Time
ON
Switch output 1, 2
OFF
5 ms
or more
10 ms
or less
[ Switchwhenoutputauto response time
shift inputs. ]
Hi
Auto shift input
Lo
Anti-chattering Function
A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large amount
of air in operation and may experience a temporary drop in Pressure
the primary pressure. This function prevents detection of Temporary fluctuation
such temporary drops in primary pressure as abnormal
pressure.
P1
Set point value P2
<Principle>
This function averages pressure values measured during
t (ms) t (ms) Time
the response time set by the user and then compares the
average pressure value with the pressure set point value <Averaging process> <Averaging process>
to output the result on the switch.
Switch output ON
operation in
normal conditions OFF
Time
Switch output
operation when ON
chattering prevention
OFF
function is on
Time
178
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 179
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Error Correction
Take the following measures when an error occurs.
Error description LCD display Contents Solution
OUT1 Shut off the power supply. After eliminating
Over current error Load current of switch output is more than 80 mA. the output factor that caused the excess
OUT2 current, turn the power supply back on.
Internal data error Shut off the power supply. Turn the
power supply back on. If the power
System error
should not come back on, please
contact SMC for an inspection.
Internal data error
Measuring Instruments
Internal data error
Sensors
∗ The upper limits and lower limits are shown in the table below.
Set pressure range Lower limit Upper limit
Compound pressure 100.0 to 100.0 kPa –100.0 kPa 100.0 kPa
Positive pressure –0.100 to 1.000 MPa –0.100 MPa 1.000 MPa
With auto shift function
Set pressure range Lower limit Upper limit
Compound pressure –100.0 to 100.0 kPa –100.0 kPa 100.0 kPa
3Positive pressure –1.000 to 1.000 MPa –1.000 MPa 1.000 MPa
179
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 180
Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Dimensions
02
ZSE50F/ISE50- T2
G2
23.4
30 30 (In case of NPT 23.9) 20
2-M3 x 0.5 depth 4
8.45
20
Piping port
M5 x 0.8 depth 5
6.4
Piping port
18.35
R, NPT 1/4
ø3.5
.4
7.8
12
25.1
2.5
10.1
15.2
10.7
ø14.5
ø22
Piping port
G 1/4
Piping port G
180
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 181
High Precision
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series ZSE50F/ISE50
Dimensions
Bracket A
A
30
20
20
45
55
4.5
40
11.5
15
.5
ø4
6.5
1.6
41.5 20
Bracket A
ZS-24-A
View A
Bracket D
A
30
20
20
Measuring Instruments
45
55
Sensors
4.5
40
11.5
4.2
15
7.2 7.5
1.6
35 41.5 22
Bracket D
View A
ZS-24-D
42.4 7.8 25.4
+0.5
40
0
36
70 or more
47.4
Air Line
Maintenance
®
Metal Body Type
(Die-cast aluminum)
For
General
Fluids
10 MPa • 15 MPa
(ISE75) (ISE75H)
digital IP67
2-color Display (green and red)
• Selectable from four patterns
ON OFF
q red green
w green red
e red red
r green green
Easily identifiable abnormal readings
10 mm character height
M12 Connector
• Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m)
• Straight and right-angled connectors
With Bracket
• User-selectable mounting orientation Functions
• Anti-chattering • Display calibration
• Zero out • Key lock
• Unit display switching
(Fixed SI unit in Japan)
• Withstand pressure: Rated pressure x 3 ISE70 (1 MPa) ISE75 (10 MPa) ISE75H (15 MPa)
MPa MPa MPa
displa settings of PSI
• Model with initial display
is also available as standard. OUT1 OUT1 OUT1
182
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 183
2-color Display
Digital Pressure Switch/For Air
Series ISE70
®
How to Order
1 MPa ISE70 02 43 M
Piping
02 Rc 1/4
N02 NPT 1/4 Option 2
F02 G1/4 (ISO1179) Nil None
With bracket
Output
Fixed setting:
43 NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) +
Color PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2)
2 A
1 65 PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4)
3 4 Display unit
Nil With unit display switching function Note) Mounting screws
Connector Pin Assignments M Fixed SI unit Note) are not included.
Output -43 (Color: Grey) Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value)
P
1 Brown DC (+) With unit display switching function
2 White OUT1 (PNP) Note) Fixed unit: MPa Option 1
Measuring Instruments
3 Blue DC (–) Nil None
4 Black OUT1 (NPN) Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
Sensors
S
straight
Output -65 (Color: Black)
Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
1 Brown DC (+) L
right-angled
2 White NC
3 Blue DC (–)
4 Black OUT1 (PNP)
When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order.
Option Part no. Note
OUT1
UP
SE
T
DO
WN
Bracket B and the bracket assembly
make up one set.
Bracket ZS-31-A Note: Mounting screws are not included.
Bracket B
Bracket assembly
183
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 184
Series ISE70
Specifications
Model ISE70
Rated pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Set pressure range –0.1 to 1 MPa
Withstand pressure 1.5 MPa
Set pressure resolution 0.01 MPa
Fluid Air, lnert gas, Non-flammable gas
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption 55 mA or less (at no load)
Switch output Output -43: Fixed setting; NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2) Note 1)
Output -65: PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4)
Max. load current 80 mA
Max. applied voltage 30 V (with NPN output)
Residual voltage 1 V or less (with load current of 80 mA)
Response time 2.5 ms (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 20 ms, 160 ms, 640 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms)
Short circuit protection With short circuit protection
Repeatability ±0.5% F.S.
Hysteresis mode
Hysteresis Adjustable (can be set from 0)
Window comparator mode
Display 3 digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (red and green) can be interlocked with the switch output, Sampling cycle: 5 times/s
Display accuracy ±2% F.S. ± 1 digit or less (at 25°C ± 3°C)
Indication light Illuminates when output is ON. (Green)
Functions Anti-chattering function, Unit display switching function, Zero out function, Key lock function
Enclosure IP67 Note 2)
Fluid temperature range 0 to 50°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Operating temperature range Operating: 0 to 50°C, Stored: –10 to 60°C (with no freezing or condensation)
Environ-
Operating humidity range Operating and stored: 35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
mental
resistance Withstand voltage 1000 VAC for 1 min. between live parts and enclosure
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 500 VDC Mega)
Vibration resistance 10 to 500 Hz, 1.5 mm or 98 m/s2 amplitude in X, Y, Z directions for 2 hours each
Impact resistance 980 m/s2 in X, Y, Z directions 3 times each (Non energized)
Temperature characteristics
(Based on 25°C: Operating ±2% F.S. or less
temperature range)
Standard Compliant with CE Marking and UL/CSA (UL508) standards
Wetted material Fitting: C3602 (electroless nickel plated), Sensor port: PBT, Sensor pressure receiving area: silicon, O-ring: NBR
Port size 02: Rc1/4, N02: NPT1/4, F02: G1/4 (ISO1179) Note 3)
Lead wire Lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector (5 m)
Mass (Weight) 190 g (excluding the lead wire with M12 4-pin pre-wired connector)
Note 1) The NPN and PNP outputs function for a single set point.
Note 2) A FKM gasket is used for sealing the housing.
Note 3) G1/4: Applicable to ISO1179-1
Main circuit
Load + (White) +
(Black) 12 to 12 to
24 VDC OUT1 (PNP) 24 VDC
– (Black) –
OUT1 (PNP) Load
Load
(White)
DC (–) DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
184
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 185
2-color Display
Digital Pressure Switch/For General Fluids
Series ISE75/75H
®
How to Order
10 MPa ISE75 02 43 M
15 MPa ISE75H 02 43 M
Piping
02 Rc 1/4 Option 2
N02 NPT 1/4 Nil None
F02 G1/4 (ISO1179) With bracket
Output
Fixed setting: A
43 NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4) +
Color PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 2)
2
1 65 PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no. 4)
Display unit
3 4
Nil With unit display switching function
M Fixed SI unit Note)
Measuring Instruments
Connector Pin Assignments
Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value) Option 1
Output -43 (Color: Grey) P
With unit display switching function Nil None
Sensors
1 Brown DC (+) Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
Note) Fixed unit: MPa S
2 White OUT1 (PNP) straight
3 Blue DC (–) Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
4 Black OUT1 (NPN) L
right-angled
Output -65 (Color: Black)
1 Brown DC (+)
2 White NC
3 Blue DC (–)
4 Black OUT1 (PNP)
When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order.
Option Part No. Note
OUT1
UP
SE
T
DO
WN
Bracket B and the bracket assembly
make up one set.
Bracket ZS-31-A
Bracket B
Bracket assembly
185
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 186
Series ISE75/75H
Specifications
Main circuit
Load + (White) +
(Black) 12 to 12 to
24 VDC OUT1 (PNP) 24 VDC
– (Black) –
OUT1 (PNP) Load
Load
(White)
DC (–) DC (–)
(Blue) (Blue)
186
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 187
Unit Description
UP button
Use this button to change the mode PRESSURE SWITCH
DOWN button
or increase the ON/OFF set value. It Use this button to change the mode
also allows you to switch to the peak or decrease the ON/OFF set value.
value display mode. It also allows you to switch to the
bottom value display mode.
Functions
±5% R.D.
Overcurrent is turned on through the output factor that
error either or both of the caused the excess
switch outputs. current, turn the power
+ supply back on.
0 Applied pressure
: Factory setting display value A pressure level greater
set prior to shipment than ±7% F.S. has been
Measuring Instruments
: Display calibration range applied during zero
adjustment. The switch Bring the pressure
Note) When the display calibration function is used, the set pressure value
Sensors
may change ±1 digit. Residual will automatically return back to atmospheric
pressure to measuring mode in pressure and try
Peak/Bottom hold function error three seconds, however. using the zero out
Note that the range of function.
This function constantly detects and updates the maximum and zero adjustment differs
minimum pressure values and allows to hold the display value. by ±1 digit due to switch-
to-switch variations.
Key lock function
Supply pressure
This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set exceeds the maximum
value accidentally. Applied set pressure. Reduce/Increase
pressure supply pressure to
Zero out (Zero ADJ) function error Supply pressure is within the set
below the minimum pressure range.
The measured pressure reading can be adjusted to zero. set pressure.
More specifically, the factory-set reading can be corrected to within ±7% F.S.
Response time selections: 20 ms, 160 ms, 640 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms
187
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 188
Series ISE70/75/75H
Dimensions
ISE70/ 75/ 75H
34
9 39
MPa
SET straight
14.5
20
15.7
24 (28.7)
(38.2) Lead wire with M12
connector (5 m)
right-angled
Piping port Note) The connector faces down
(toward the piping).
02: Rc 1/4
Do not attempt to rotate
N02: NPT 1/4
the connector, as it is not
F02: G1/4 (ISO1179)
rotatable.
Note) Compatible to ISO1179-1.
Color
2
1
With bracket 3 4
34
9 44.5
Connector Pin
Assignments
MPa
Output -43
(Color: Grey)
OUT1
1 Brown DC (+)
UP DOWN
2 White OUT1 (PNP)
SET
3 Blue DC (–)
4 Black OUT1 (NPN)
14.5
90
Output -65
(Color: Black)
.5
2-6 1 Brown DC (+)
2 White NC
18.3
3 Blue DC (–)
4 Black OUT1 (PNP)
(28.7)
46 35
(38.2)
60
24
Piping port
02: Rc 1/4
N02: NPT 1/4
F02: G1/4 (ISO1179)
Note) Compatible to ISO1179-1.
6
188
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 189
Air Line
Maintenance
Digital Pressure Switch (For vacuum) (For positive pressure) Liquid Removal
with Backlight
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B Coolant
ON ON
Measuring Instruments
Hysteresis
mode OFF OFF
Sensors
P2 P1 n2 n1
(Standard) (Inverted)
Window ON ON
comparator
mode OFF OFF
P1 P2 n1 n2
(Standard) (Inverted)
189
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 190
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
How to Order
Positive
Pressure ISE5B L
Vacuum ZSE5B L
Output specification
26 Analog output (1 to 5 V)
27 NPN open collector 2 outputs
67 PNP open collector 2 outputs
Panel adaptor A
Panel adaptor B
Mounting bracket
190
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 191
Measuring Instruments
Port size 02: R 1/4, M5 x 0.8 T2: NPTF 1/4, M5 x 0.8
Enclosure IP40
Sensors
Note 1) Equipped with unit switching function [The type without the unit Window comparator mode
switching function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa or MPa).] ZSE: Since the hysteresis is 2 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 5 digits
Note 2) Hysteresis mode or more when setting.
ZSE: When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2 ISE: Since the hysteresis is 3 digits, separate P1 and P2 by 7 digits
is within 2 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 2 digits for or more when setting.
the set value of P1. ∗ 1 digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above.)
ISE: When the value of P1 and P2 are the same, or when P1 > P2 Note 3) The analog output type has no overcurrent detection function.
is within 3 digits, the hysteresis will automatically be 3 digits for
the set value of P1.
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
Pressure Setting
Setting procedure
Initial setting
1. Set Mode 2. Display Units 3. Select OUT1 Output Mode 4. Select OUT2 Output Mode
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH SMC PRESSURE SWITCH SMC PRESSURE SWITCH SMC PRESSURE SWITCH
Note) Note)
SET SET SET
RESET RESET RESET RESET
SET SET Press the SET Press the SET Setting is completed
SET button. SET button. when the SET
button is pressed.
Press the SET button and hold Select a display unit by pressing the Out1 changes between and Out2 changes between and
for one second or longer. “1.3” is button. by pressing the button. by pressing the button.
displayed as shown above and For high pressure: : Normal output : Normal output
the unit flasher. MPa → PSI → kgf/cm2 → bar : Inverted output : Inverted output
Note) “1.3” indicates the micro For low pressure:
(Refer to Table 1 .) (Refer to Table 1 .)
computer's program mmHg → kPa → PSI → kgf/cm2 → bar
version.
Unit display changes for the type with
the unit switching function only.
The type without the unit switching
function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa
or MPa).
192
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 193
Setting procedure
1. Setting Value Input Mode 2. OUT1 Setting Value (1) Input 3. OUT1 Setting Value (2) Input
SET
mmHg
RESET RESET RESET
SET button.
button: Increases the setting value button: Increases the setting value
Press the SET button. button: Decreases the setting value button: Decreases the setting value
(Refer to Table 2 when using in
vacuum.
4. OUT2 Setting Value (1) Input 5. OUT2 Setting Value (2) Input
Measuring Instruments
1. Hysteresis mode
P2: P1:
<Example> When switched at –50 kPa or higher and –50 kPa –40 kPa
Sensors
the hysteresis is 10 kPa
Negative 0 Positive
• Set P1 at –40 kPa and P2 at –50 kPa. pressure pressure
ON
Inverted output
OFF
Relationship between pressure and switch output
-66kPa
–66 kPa -34kPa
–34 kPa
ON
Standard output
OFF
ON
Inverted output
OFF
Relationship between pressure and switch output
193
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 194
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
Other Functions Error Correction
• Peak Display Mode Take the following corrective actions when errors occur.
PRESSURE SWITCH Displays the peak pressure value (highest
Display Contents Solution
degree of vacuum) when the UP button is pressed
during pressure display. The LCD displays “H”.
Press the UP button again to return to the Set data was changed Push the UP and
RESET previous display. by accident for an Down buttons to reset
SET
unknown reason. all data.
Brown DC (+)
-27 [Red]
Load
Max. 80 mA↓ +
Max. 30 V, 80 mA White OUT2
12 to 24 VDC
–
Residual voltage: LED Red
[Yellow]
Load
1 V or less Blue DC (–)
[Black]
Brown DC (+)
-67 [Red Parts list
PNP Open Collector No. Description Material
Black OUT1
Max. 80 mA
[White] → 1 Indicator panel Denatured PPO
Main circuit
Load +
12 to 24 VDC 2 Body PBT
Max. 80 mA LED Green White OUT2 Max. 80 mA –
[Yellow] → 3 Seal NBR
Load
Blue DC (–) 4 Lead wire Vinyl chloride (Vinyl sheath)
LED Red [Black]
5 Pressure sensor Stainless steel 630
6 Fitting Stainless steel 304
194
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 195
Wiring Others
Warning Caution
1. Withstand voltage 1. Panel mounting
Withstand voltage between the metal fitting and lead wire of the switch is
Insert the panel adaptor A from the front side of the panel.
250 V. Do not apply voltage in excess of 250 V.
↓
Firmly secure the panel adaptor A with the panel adaptors B from the
Caution back side of the panel.
1. When there is a danger of induction noise being generated in the piping,
↓
ground the piping. Insert a pressure switch in to the panel adaptor A from the back side
of the panel.
↓
Pressure Source Secure the switch with a mounting bracket.
Panel adaptor A
Warning
1. Operating fluid
Sections in contact with fluid are made of stainless steel 630 (pressure
sensor) and stainless steel 304 (fitting). Use a fluid that will not corrode
these materials. The corrosion resistance of stainless steel 630 and that
of stainless steel 304 are almost the same. For reference, non-corrosive Panel adaptor B
fluids and gases for stainless steel 304 are shown below.
Dry air
Pressure switch
Drainage-containing air
Hydraulic fluid (JIS-K2213)
Silicon oil (JIS-K2213)
Lubrication oil (JIS-K6301)
Fluoro carbon
Carbon dioxide
Measuring Instruments
Mounting bracket
Ammonia
Sensors
Argon
Gaseous nitrogen
195
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 196
Series ZSE5B/ISE5B
Dimensions
Standard type
30 39 4-ø2.7 20
Depth 6.5 Sensor
Fitting
30
20
RESET
53.5
SET
8.5
5
02: R 1/4
12.3 M5 x 0.8 depth 5
T2: NPTF 1/4
17
28
With bracket
50 (44)
40 4-ø4.5 39
30
RESET
53.5
SET
8.5
Bracket
Lead wire length
ZS-22-D
3000
12.3
17
28
Mounting
bracket
SMC PRESSURE SWITCH ZS-22-04
36 +0.5
0
40
58.5
RESET
SET
196
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 197
Measurement unit switching for global use
Freely selectable display units and easy unit conversions also make it ideal for the
SI unit transition period.
Backlight for easy viewing in dark locations
Long service life of 12 months continuous operation
Measuring Instruments
Continuous one year operation is possible with two AA batteries (3 V).
Sensors
The digital display of line Regulator settings can be
pressure eliminates human
reading errors.
performed more precisely
than with a dial gauge by Convenient hand strap for carrying
viewing the digital display. Keeping practical use in mind, the hand strap is a standard feature.
It is also possible to check
pulsation in the supply Furthermore, since the unit
pressure using the
peak/bottom display
is battery operated, power
lines are not necessary. Zero/span calibration is possible
function. Offset adjustment with the zero clear function, and span calibration with the trimmer
can be performed.
Tube coupler
Pressure can be
supplied or stopped
by inserting or MPa MPa
Finger valve
197
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 198
Series PPA
How to Order
PPA10 0
Pressure specification Option/Case holder
0 –0.1 to 1 MPa (for high pressure) Nil Without case
1 –101 to 10 kPa (for vacuum) B With PPA-B
2 –10 to 100 kPa (for low pressure)
Unit specification
Nil With unit switching function
B Fixed SI unit Note)
Note) Fixed units
For vacuum/low pressure: kPa
For high pressure: MPa
Model PPA100 for high pressure PPA101 for vacuum PPA102 for low pressure
Rated pressure range –0.1 to 1 MPa –101 to 10 kPa –10 to 100 kPa
Pressure display 3-digit LCD with backlight
Pressure display resolution 1/100
kPa —— 1 1
MPa 0.01 —— ——
mmHg —— 5 ——
Note 1)
Minimum kgf/cm2 0.1 0.01 0.01
display units
inHg —— 0.2 ——
PSI 1 0.1 0.1
bar 0.1 0.01 0.01
Error display Excess pressure, Memory data error, Change battery signal
Peak/Bottom display, Backlight, Auto power OFF
Functions
Zero clear, Unit display switching
Withstand pressure 1.5 MPa 200 kPa 200 kPa
Fluid Air, Non-corrosive gas
Power supply 3 V(DC), Type AA dry cell battery x 2 pcs. Note 2)
Battery life 12 months continuous operation (without back lighting)
Response speed 250 ms
Display accuracy ±2% F.S. or less (Temperature conditions: at 25°C)
Repeatability ±1% F.S. or less (Temperature conditions: at 25°C)
Temperature characteristics ±3% F.S. or less (0 to 50°C, based on 25°C)
Piping port M5 x 0.8
Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C (with no condensation)
Ambient humidity 35 to 85% RH (with no condensation)
Impact resistance 100 G in X, Y, Z directions, 3 times each
Enclosure IP40 (IEC standard)
Weight Approx. 100 g (Unit 50 g, Batteries 50 g)
Note 1) Equipped with unit switching function [The type without the unit switching function will have a fixed SI unit (kPa or
MPa).]
Note 2) Two pieces of type AA dry cell batteries (manganese R6 or alkaline LR6) are not included.
198
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 199
Initial Setting
Be sure to initialize the operating unit set when
using for the first time and after changing
batteries, as the unit will indicate memory data
error.
1. Press and hold the 1. The display will show
POWER button for 3 “Err”. Turn the power
seconds or more. OFF.
“P” for peak display
2. Press and hold down for 6
“b” for bottom display LCD seconds or longer. The
unit will be zero cleared.
• Present pressure display When this happens,
• Peak/Bottom value display “CAL” will appear on the
• Unit display LCD.
MPa
POWER LIGHT
MPa
POWER LIGHT
Measuring Instruments
Sensors
Power ON
Press the POWER • The power comes ON as it is
button. pressed.
• When pressed and held for 6
seconds or more, the unit is
zero cleared.
MPa
POWER LIGHT
Power OFF
Press and hold the • When pressed and held for 3
POWER button for seconds or more, the power
3 seconds or more. turns OFF.
• When there is no button
operation for more than 5
minutes, the power turns OFF.
(automatic power OFF
function)
POWER LIGHT
199
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 200
Series PPA
Operation and Functions
(PPA100 shown. Unit: MPa)
MPa
bar
MPa
POWER LIGHT
POWER LIGHT
200
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 201
Scale: 70%
PPA100
LOCK MODE(AUTO POWER OFF CANCEL)
POWER LIGHT
POWER LIGHT
Body
Span calibration
110
180
+ –
– +
Type AA dry cell batteries (2 pcs.)
(Front) (Back)
20
Measuring Instruments
Option/Case holder
5 Fitting port size
M5 x 0.8
Sensors
Thread depth 5 44
9.2 6.8
4.5 2
SMC
15
)
(R
25
2-
ø4.5
18
120
29
201
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 202
Series PPA
Error Correction Maintenance
Take the following corrective actions when errors occur. • Span calibration method
Caution
Do not touch the span calibration trimmer except when performing
Display Contents Solution
span calibration.
Pressure being applied is Operate within the rated 1. Perform zero clear at atmospheric pressure.
above the rating. pressure range. 2. Apply the maximum rated pressure, and calibrate the span while
comparing with a standard pressure gauge.
Memory data has probably been Perform auto zero 3. If the display value of the compact manometer is “0” after returning to
corrupted in some way. adjustment. atmospheric pressure, then calibration is complete. If the display value is
not "0," calibrate again by repeating step 2.
Entire display Battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries.
flashes
Standard Compact
pressure gauge manometer
Trimmer
Compressor
Switching between pressurization and atmospheric Pressure can be supplied or stopped by inserting or
release can be easily performed by switching the control removing a tube.
knob.
Finger Valve Tube Coupler
Series VHK Series KC
202
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 203
Air Line
Maintenance
Air Blow
World's first external connection type
measuring instrument for air flow rate
Measuring air leakage for each line and equipment
IN502-07-A
Equipment
Equipment
Measuring Instruments
Simple operation with measuring time of 5 to 10 minutes.
Sensors
Wide measuring range from 300 to 3000 l/min (ANR).
Portable: Battery operated and does not require any other power
supply preparation.
The energy saving automatic power shut off function turns power
OFF when not operated for more than 10 minutes.
Standard specifications
Model IN502-07-A
Flow rate display range 0 to 9999 l/min (ANR)
Flow rate display unit l/min (ANR), CFM x 10 -1
Flow rate display resolution l/min (ANR)
Operating pressure range 0.1 to 1.0 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Pressure display unit MPa
Flow measuring accuracy ±15% of reading [300 to 3000 l/min (ANR) ∗]
Fluid Air
Leakage 10 cc/min or less (based on 0°C, 1 atm)
Power supply voltage 3 VDC, Type AA dry cell battery x 2
Battery life Approx. 720 measurements
Port size Rc 3/8
Weight 1.7 kg (without batteries)
∗ The measuring error may be greater than ±15% outside the flow range.
203
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 204
Unit Descriptions
Dimensions
120 17 220 ( 24 )
(15)
LIGHT
CLOSE OPEN
Nozzle
Operation
Connect the extra port downstream from the stop valve to the pressure supply port of the air leakage tester.
<Initial setting> <Measuring>
1. Select a nozzle size. 1. Enter the P1 pressure value.
Press the SELECT button and hold for 2 seconds or longer. Fully open the stop valve and press the SET button.
When the display indicates as shown below, select the size of the
nozzle which is attached to the EXHAUST outlet on the back side,
and press the SET button.
P1 ∗∗∗∗
Press the SET button.
P1 ∗∗∗∗
Press the SELECT button and hold for 2 seconds or longer. 2. Enter the P2 pressure value.
Select a flow display unit, and then press the SET button.
SEL SEL SEL 1) Press the SELECT button to confirm the P2 set pressure range.
n_1.0 SELECT n_1.5 SELECT n_2.0
2) Gradually close the stop valve to reduce the pressure until it is below the
confirmed set range.
SELECT 3) Press the SET button when the pressure level is below the set range.
Complete
4. Calculate the flow.
Based on the entered pressure values, the flow rate is
automatically calculated and displayed.
CAL U1 ∗∗∗∗
Flow display
204
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 205
Stable detection of
0.01
clearance
to 0.5 mm
Due to the pneumatic bridge circuit and semiconductor
pressure sensor, the non-contact type sensor is hardly
affected by fluctuations in the supply pressure.
Measuring Instruments
Sensors
Modular construction
Requires less man hours to wire.
205
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 206
Series ISA2
Extraneous Easy-to-operate
material
W large dial
Set position
Green
Scale provides
Below set position
guidelines for set
Green
position.
Position of supply port: Either right side or left side is available.
2 wiring methods Variations
Model ISA2-G ISA2-H
Operating
pressure range 30 to 200 kPa 50 to 200 kPa
206
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 207
How to Order
Manifold
Without control unit IISA2 N PL 3 B
With control unit IISA2 C SL 3 B 1 D E2
Pressure gauge of regulator Note 1)
A∗ Without pressure gauge Note 2)
E2 MPa single notation 0.2 Square embedded
pressure gauge
Control unit Z2∗ PSI single notation MPa
C With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve E4 MPa single notation 0.4
V With 2 port solenoid valve Z4∗ PSI single notation MPa
G2 MPa single notation 0.2 Roundgauge
pressure
P2∗ MPa-PSI double notation MPa
G4 MPa single notation 0.4
Electrical entry and supply port position P4∗ MPa-PSI double notation MPa
Note 1) Due to new Japanese weight and
SR Centralized wiring with supply port on the right
measurement legislation, PSI notation
SL Centralized wiring with supply port on the left type cannot be sold or used in Japan.
PR Individual wiring with supply port on the right Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8.
PL Individual wiring with supply port on the left ∗ Manufactured upon receipt of order.
Note) The supply port position is the one when the switch
is viewed from the front.
Stations Throttle/Manual lock of 2 port
solenoid valve
1 1 station
Nil Without throttle, without manual lock
2 2 stations
3 3 stations C With throttle, without manual lock
4 4 stations W Without throttle, with manual lock
5 5 stations M With throttle, with manual lock
6 6 stations Throttle
Measuring
Sensors
Option
Instruments
Manual lock
Sensors
Nil Without bracket
B With bracket
Measuring
Instruments
With mounting
D
bracket for DIN rail
Note) DIN rail must be
ordered separately. Electrical entry of 2 port solenoid valve
(Refer to the page
221.) D : DIN connector D0: DIN connector T : Conduit terminal
DL: DIN connector (Without connector) TL: Conduit terminal
(With indicator light) (With indicator light)
Voltage of 2 port
solenoid valve
1 100 VAC
2 200 VAC
3 110 VAC
4 220 VAC
5 24 VDC
6 12 VDC
36 230 VAC
207
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 208
Series ISA2
How to Order
Individual wiring
G 1/8 5 PNP output
∗ Made to order
Pressure gauge Note 1) Right angle
A∗
Without pressure gauge Note 2)
E2 MPa single notation 0.2 Square embedded L∗
pressure gauge
Z2∗ PSI single notation MPa
E4 MPa single notation 0.4
Z4∗ PSI single notation MPa N Without lead wire
G2 MPa single notation 0.2 Round pressure
Centralized wiring
gauge
P2∗ MPa-PSI double notation MPa
G4 MPa single notation 0.4 Terminal block
P
P4∗ MPa-PSI double notation MPa box
Note 1) Due to new Japanese weight and
measurement legislation, PSI notation
type cannot be sold or used in Japan. ∗ Manufactured upon receipt
Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8. of order.
∗ Manufactured upon receipt of order.
Ordering Examples
Without control unit
Centralized wiring Individual wiring Centralized wiring/Supply port right
Individual wiring
Centralized wiring air catch sensor Centralized wiring air catch sensor
Terminal block box air catch sensor ISA2-GE41N Terminal block box ISA2-HE41P
ISA2-GE41P
3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0
6
PU
L L SET
9
Supply port Supply port 6
PU
L L SET
9 6
PU
L L SET
9 6
PU
L L SET
9 6
PU
L L SET
9
Supply port
0.1
0.2
0.3 IN IN 0.1
0.2
0.3 0.1
0.2
0.3 0.1
0.2
0.3 0.1
0.2
0.3 IN
0 0.4 0 0.4 0 0.4 0 0.4 0 0.4
MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa
IISA2NSR-1B1 set (1 station manifold part number) IISA2NPL-1D1 set (1 station manifold part number) IISA2NSR-3D1 set (3 stations manifold part number)
∗ISA2-GE41P1 set (Air catch sensor part number) ∗ISA2-GE41N 1 set (Air catch sensor part number) ∗ISA2-HE41P 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number)
Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor
with an asterisk (∗). with an asterisk (∗). with an asterisk (∗).
Regulator
PU PU PU PU PU PU
L L SET L L SET L L SET LL S ET LL S ET LL S ET
Left Right
Bracket Bracket
Stations 3 2 1 Stations 1 2 3
IISA2CSL-3B5DLCE21 set (3 stations manifold part number) IISA2VPR-3B5DLC1 set (3 stations manifold part number)
∗ISA2-HE41P 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number) ∗ISA2-GE41 3 sets (Air catch sensor part number)
Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an
asterisk (∗). asterisk (∗).
208
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 209
Specifications
Measuring Instruments
Lead wire (Individual wiring type) 4-core, oil resistant, cable (0.64 mm2) with M12, 4-pin pre-wired connector
Terminal block box (Centralized wiring type) Front wiring (Electrical entry ø21)
Sensors
Individual wiring type (body only): 253 g, common wiring type (body only): 250 g,
Weight
Terminal box: 205 g, lead wire: 278 g, connecting bracket with sealing for additional station: 4 g
Note 1) Refer to “Relation between Nozzle Diameter and Detection Distance” for hysteresis.
Note 2) Refer to “Setting Procedure” for LED level meter.
Working Principle
209
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 210
Series ISA2
NPN open collector output Circuit and Wiring for 2 Port Solenoid Valve
DC (+)
Without indicator light DC circuit Without display light AC Circuit
Main circuit of
OUT
Load
1 DC (+) 1 ( )
switch
2 DC () 2 ( )
1 DC (+) 1 ( )
MAX 80 mA Rectifying
switch
OUT device
Load 12 to 24 VDC ZNR ZNR
12 to 24 VDC SOL. 100 to 200 VAC
SOL.
DC ()
LED 2 DC () indicator 2 ( )
light
Wiring
1 Brown DC (+)
OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
2 NC 6 9
1 2 3 4 5
3: Blue
3 Blue DC () DC DC OUT
4: Black Black NC
4 OUT () (+) 6
1. Insert the connector of the lead wire with its key groove at the
proper position.
2. Hold the knurl with 2 fingers and rotate it clockwise until finger 1. Mount the seal conduit on the terminal block box. For mounting
tight. procedure, refer to the catalog and instruction manual provided
by the manufacturer of the seal conduit.
Lead wire with connector
2. Thread the cable through the seal conduit and arrange wiring
Knurl according to the polarity of the terminal block illustrated above.
3. Fasten the seal conduit with a tightening torque not greater
than 5 N⋅m. Do not hold the terminal block box or the switch.
210
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 211
The data in the following charts are characteristics of hysteresis at the detection distance.
In case accuracy is required by the settings, the design should be made so that the hysteresis will stay within the optimum adjustment
range not larger than 0.01 mm.
The smaller the hysteresis, the better the sensitivity. In cases where the hysteresis exceeds 0.01 mm, the air catch sensor should be used
to check the presence of the work piece.
ISA2-G ISA2-H
Hysteresis (mm)
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06 100 kPa
0.05 0.05
100 kPa
0.04 0.04
0.03 200 kPa 0.03
200 kPa
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
Optimum adjustment range Optimum adjustment range
0 0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
Detection distance (mm) Detection distance (mm)
Measuring Instruments
100 kPa
Hysteresis (mm)
Hysteresis (mm)
0.07 0.07
Sensors
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
100 kPa
0.04 0.04
200 kPa
0.03 0.03
200 kPa
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
Optimum adjustment range Optimum adjustment range
0 0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
Detection distance (mm) Detection distance (mm)
Hysteresis (mm)
0.07 0.07
0.06 0.06
0.05 0.05
100 kPa
0.04 0.04
200 kPa
0.03 0.03
200 kPa
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
Optimum adjustment range Optimum adjustment range
0 0
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5
Detection distance (mm) Detection distance (mm)
211
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 212
Series ISA2
Response Time
Response time changes with detection distance and piping length. It is hardly influenced by the supply pressure and nozzle diameter
(ø1.0 to ø2.0).
While all graphs assume a fixed set distance with changes in the detection distance, the upper charts show responses at various set
values and the lower charts show responses at various piping lengths. If the set distance is equal to the set value, the response becomes
quicker as the set value becomes smaller or the piping length becomes shorter.
ISA2-G ISA2-H
Supply pressure: 100 kPa
Detection nozzle: ø1.5 Supply pressure: 100 kPa Detection nozzle: ø2.0
Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m
2.5 2
Set value
2
0.05 mm 1.5 Set value
Response time (sec)
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Detection distance (mm)
Detection distance (mm)
2
8m
0.9
1.5 8m 5m
5m 0.6
1
3m
3m 0.3
0.5
1m 1m
0 0
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35
Detection distance (mm)
Detection distance (mm)
2 or more
2 or more
212
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 213
The charts illustrate changes in the detection distance with fluctuations in the supply pressure.
ISA2-G ISA2-H
0.2 0.3
0.15 mm
0.2 0.15 mm
0.1
0.1
0.01 mm 0.03 mm
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
Supply pressure (kPa) Supply pressure (kPa)
0.3
0.4
0.2 0.3
Measuring Instruments
0.15 mm
0.2 0.15 mm
Sensors
0.1
0.1
0.01 mm 0.03 mm
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
Supply pressure (kPa) Supply pressure (kPa)
0.3
0.4
0.2 0.3
0.15 mm
0.2
0.15 mm
0.1
0.1
0.01 mm 0.03 mm
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 0 50 100 150 200 250
Supply pressure (kPa) Supply pressure (kPa)
213
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 214
Series ISA2
Setting Procedure
The detection distance is set with the LED level meter and setting 1. For accuracy in setting, apply a clearance gauge to the dete-
dial. ction nozzle to replicate the set condition in advance.
Keep the setting dial pulled out while in use. If released, it will 2. Confirm that the set pressure is applied. If the setting dial is
return to its original position and become unable to rotate. fully closed, the LED level meter appears as .
3. Pull the setting dial and rotate it in the positive direction. The
lights will turn on in the order shown below.
Rotate in the
positive direction.
Pull out
Red
Green 2
4. The sensor output comes on when the lights on the LED level
meter turn on as . Complete the setting when this condi-
tion is observed.
5. Apply the clearance gauge again to confirm that the lights turn
Pulled out on as .
Handling and setting of 2 port solenoid valve Handling and setting of limit gauge indicator
Throttle setting for blowing to prevent water and cutting oil OPEN arrow
1. Removal of cover
from entering the nozzle. Hook the finger on the front
(Clockwise: Close throttle; Counterclockwise: Open throttle) cover ridge and rotate it in
the direction of the OPEN
∗ The setting is not applicable to valves without throttle. arrow until it stops (15).
Then pull out and remove
1. Power off the valve. the cover.
2. Rotate the throttle clockwise for adjustment so that the
detection nozzle will not suck up water or cutting oil. 2. Setting the installation needle
The installation needle should be moved by the fingertip.
Set the 2 green installation needles at the maximum and
minimum limits of pressure.
Example
Rotate
clockwise
IN
Throttle
3. Installation of cover
After setting the installation needles, locate the OPEN
arrow at the top right position and insert the claws on the
cover into the grooves on the case (indicated by in the
expanded view of A part). Rotate the cover clockwise until
it stops. Confirm that the cover is firmly secured.
Solenoid
214
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 215
Measuring Instruments
Note 2) Set dial scales are as follows;
Sensors
3
0.2
le
Sca
3 0
6 9
215
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 216
Series ISA2
∗ When the SUP port is on the left, the stations are sequentially
Dimensions: Centralized Wiring Type numbered from the side of the terminal block box.
With bracket L1
3 60 38 L2 38 5
Terminal block box LED level meter
3 0 3 0 3 0
PU PU PU
LL SET LL SET LL SET
81
6 9 6 9 6 9
Setting dial
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3
12
Pressure gauge
12
21
Bracket
24
5.5
DC () OUT 6
17
DC (+)
39
5
Detection port M4 x 8
19
Rc, NPT, G1/8 (With HW, SW)
Terminal block box wiring diagram For the bracket attachment
position, refer to page 219.
Seal conduit entry
(ø21)
End plate L
End plate R
3 0 3 0 3 0
PU PU PU
LL SET LL SET LL SET
81
6 9 6 9 6 9
Stations 1 2 3 4 5 6
63(Max. 65)
DC () OUT 6
17
19 Detection port
Terminal block box wiring diagram Seal conduit entry Rc, NPT, G1/8
(ø21)
216
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 217
With bracket
L1
3 38 L2 38 5
LED level meter
Lead wire connector
End plate L
End plate R
3 0 3 0 3 0
92
PU PU PU
L L SE T L L SE T L L SE T
81
6 9 6 9 6 9
12
21
Bracket
Left Right
Stations 1························· n
Stations 1 2 3 4 5 6
63(Max. 65)
Measuring Instruments
L1
Sensors
3 38 L2 38 5
LED level meter Lead wire connector
End plate L
End plate R
3 0 3 0 3 0
DIN rail
92
PU PU PU
L L SET L L SET L L SET
Setting dial
81
center 6 9 6 9 6 9
20.5
Stations 1 2 3 4 5 6
63(Max. 65)
32.2
L2 38 76 114 152
38
34
Series ISA2
3 3
Throttle needle
SUP port PU
LL
SUP port PU
LL
6 6
Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/8
118
143
144
0.1 0.1
0.1
0.05 0.15
0 0
0 MPa 0.2
178
DIN
64.4
DIN
connector
25
97
Conduit terminal Conduit terminal
82
DIN
connector
DIN connector
0 0
SET SET
9 9
162
0.3 0.3
0.1
133
0.05 0.15
128
0.4 0.4
0 MPa0.2
103
64.4
SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Throttle needle SUP port
Rc, NPT, G 1/8
42 10 40 25
218
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 219
With 2 stations, the bracket is mounted on the second sensor from the left.
1 2
Left 1 2 Right 1 2
With n stations, the bracket is mounted on the first and “n” th sensor from the left.
1 2 n
1. Disassembly 1. Loosen the screws and remove the 2 mounting brackets on the
front and back side.
2. Disassemble the switch carefully so that the O-ring on the SUP
port will not be detached.
Measuring Instruments
Slot for removal
Sensors
Hook the fingers on the top and
bottom removal grooves to pull out
the plate.
Existing joint brackets
It can be removed by pulling
horizontally.
3. Assembly
1. Tighten the joint brackets with the prescribed tightening torque
of 1.2 N⋅m.
2. Arrange pneumatic piping and confirm that there is no air leak-
age from new joints.
219
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 220
Series ISA2
Parts List
End plate R
ISA-6-B
Combination
t
h
bracket
ig
End plate L ISA-3-A
R
ISA-6-A
Seal for additional station
ISA-7-B
Throttle
Spacer
Regulator Y20
Joint bracket Lead wire with connector (Individual wiring type) Bracket DIN rail mounting bracket
ISA-3-A ISA-8-A ISA-8-B ISA-4-A ISA-9-A
A pair consists 1 set. Straight, 5 m Right angle, 5 m
With mounting
screw 2 pcs.
220
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 221
DIN Rail
ISA-5-
L
Applicable model
1.25 8 4.5 7.5 Part no. L
Individual wiring type Centralized wiring type
ISA-5-1 73.0 IISA2P-1
ISA-5-2 135.5 IISA2P-2 IISA2S-1
ISA-5-3 173.0 IISA2P-3 IISA2S-2
ISA-5-4 210.5 IISA2P-4 IISA2S-3
35
35
5.5
AR 20 02 E 1 VCA27A 5 DL S 4 02 Q
Thread type Port size
Voltage 02 Rc 1/4 CE
Nil Rc 1 100 VAC marked
02N NPT 1/4
N NPT 2 200 VAC 02F G 1/4
F G 3 110 VAC
Option (The shape of pressure gauge) Note 2) 4 220 VAC Throttle
Nil None 5 24 VDC Nil Without throttle and manual lock
E Square embedded pressure gauge (With limit indicator) 6 12 VDC S With throttle
Measuring Instruments
G Note 1) Round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) 36 230 VAC B With manual lock
Note 1) The pressure gauge port is Rc 1/8. The pressure gauge K With manual lock and throttle
Sensors
is included in the package (not assembled).
Electrical entry
Note 2) Order individually when 0.4 MPa gauge is required.
D DIN connector
Option specification DL DIN connector (With light)
Nil None D0 DIN connector (Without connector)
N Non-relieving T Conduit terminal
R Flow direction: Right to left TL Conduit terminal (With light)
Z Note 1) Unit representations on the label and pressure gauge are PSI and F
When specifying more than one option, enter symbols first in numerical, then Standard Specifications
in alphabetical orders. Valve type Direct operation poppet
Note 1) Compatible with thread type NPT. Under the New Measurement Law, Fluid Air, Inert gas
this type is only sold outside Japan. (The SI unit is used inside Japan.)
Valve specifications
221
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 222
Due to the construction of the sensor, fluctuations in the supply
pressure do not influence operation. This is a non-contact type
sensor for applications requiring confirmation of workpiece
presence for machining operations.
For Detection of Workpiece Presence
How to Order
Option
Nil ∗ For DIN rail
Output specification B With bracket
11 NPN open collector 1 output G With gauge
15 PNP open collector 1 output ∗ Order DIN rail separately.
Station 1 to 6
Wiring specification
Nil Individual wiring (without terminal block box)
Centralized wiring
Example 1) NPN output, 4 stations, centralized wiring with terminal L (with terminal block box on left side)
block box on left side, with bracket and gauge
R Centralized wiring
ISA11-4L-01BG (with terminal block box on right side)
222
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 223
Measuring Instruments
Flow consumption Supply pressure 21 l/min at 0.15 MPa
25 l/min at 0.2 MPa
Sensors
223
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 224
XT-92-65
ø50
Knob for negative
36 pressure detection setting
Specifications
Operating pressure range 0.15 to 0.8 MPa
30 Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60°C
2
Effective area (Cv factor) 2.7 mm2 (0.15)
8
102
2-M5 x 0.8
4-Rc 1/8
224
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:28 AM Page 225
Vacuum Equipment
Vacuum Equipment
225
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 226
Vacuum Ejector
Box Type (with Built-in Silencer) Body Ported Type Series ZH Liquid Removal
SUP EXH
Silenced exhaust
One-touch and threaded
connections can be combined.
Depending on the operating conditions, port
connections can be combined with a choice of
VAC One-touch and threaded connections.
Ejector symbol
Mounting
holes
Box type
(built-in silencer)
ZHB
Models/Specifications
Maximum
Nozzle vacuum pressure∗ Maximum suction flow Air consumption Connection
Weight
Model diameter Body type (kPa) l/min (ANR) l/min (ANR) (One-touch/Threaded)
mm (g)
S type L type S type L type S type/L type SUP VAC EXH
ZH05B 0.5 5 8 13 28
ZH07B 0.7 Box type 12 20 23 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 28
(with built-in silencer) –88 –48 —
ZH10B 1.0 24 34 46 33
ZH13B 1.3 40 70 78 ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4 66
ZH05D 0.5 5 8 13 11
ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8
ZH07D 0.7 Body ported type 12 20 23 12
(without silencer) –88 –48
ZH10D 1.0 24 34 46 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø8/Rc 1/8 16
ZH13D 1.3 40 70 78 ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4 ø10/Rc 1/4 27
ZH15D 1.5 55 75 95 ø10/Rc 1/4 43
Body ported type ø12/Rc 3/8 ø12/Rc 3/8
ZH18D 1.8 (without silencer) –88 –53 65 110 150 ø12/Rc 3/8 55
ZH20D 2.0 85 135 185 ø12/Rc 3/8 ø16/Rc 1/2 ø16/Rc 1/2 95
∗ Supply pressure: 0.45MPa.
226
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 227
Vacuum Ejector
Box Type (with Built-in Silencer)/Body Ported Type Series ZH
How to Order
Note) Refer to tables and below for SUP/VAC/EXH port connection combinations and port sizes.
Box Type
(with Built-in Silencer) ZH 07 B S 06 06
Body Ported Type
(without Silencer) ZH 07 D S 01 01 01
EXH port size Note)
Nozzle diameter
Symbol Size Type
05 ø0.5 mm
06 ø6 One-touch
07 ø0.7 mm
08 ø8 One-touch
10 ø1.0 mm
10 ø10 One-touch
13 ø1.3 mm
12 ø12 One-touch
15 ø1.5 mm
16 ø16 One-touch
18 ø1.8 mm
01 Rc 1/8 Threaded
20 ø2.0 mm
02 Rc 1/4 Threaded
03 Rc 3/8 Threaded
04 Rc 1/2 Threaded
Maximum vacuum pressure
S –88 kPa
L –48 kPa
VAC port size Note)
SUP port size Note) Symbol Size Type
06 ø6 One-touch
Symbol Size Type
10 ø10 One-touch
06 ø6 One-touch
12 ø12 One-touch
08 ø8 One-touch
16 ø16 One-touch
10 ø10 One-touch
01 Rc 1/8 Threaded
12 ø12 One-touch
02 Rc 1/4 Threaded
01 Rc 1/8 Threaded
03 Rc 3/8 Threaded
02 Rc 1/4 Threaded
04 Rc 1/2 Threaded
03 Rc 3/8 Threaded
Vacuum Equipment
Table 1. Connection combinations Table 2. Port sizes
Body type SUP VAC EXH Connection (one-touch/threaded)
Model
One-touch One-touch — SUP VAC EXH
Box type
One-touch Threaded — ZH05B
(with built-in silencer)
Threaded Threaded — ZH07B ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8
—
One-touch One-touch One-touch ZH10B
Body ported type
One-touch Threaded One-touch ZH13B ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4
(without silencer)
Threaded Threaded Threaded ZH05D
ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8
ZH07D
ZH10D ø6/Rc 1/8 ø6/Rc 1/8 ø8/Rc 1/8
ZH13D ø8/Rc 1/8 ø10/Rc 1/4 ø10/Rc 1/4
ZH15D ø10/Rc 1/4
ø12/Rc 3/8 ø12/Rc 3/8
ZH18D ø12/Rc 3/8
ZH20D ø12/Rc 3/8 ø16/Rc 1/2 ø16/Rc 1/2
227
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 228
Space-saving ejector that can be installed in-line with the piping
EXH Diffuser
Body
ZU 05 S
Maximum vacuum pressure
S –85 kPa
L –48 kPa
Nozzle diameter
05 ø0.5 mm
07 ø0.7 mm
Specifications
Fluid Air
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa
Standard supply pressure 0.45 MPa
Operating temperature range 5 to 60°C
Applicable tube O.D. SUP port: ø6, VAC port: ø6
Models
228
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 229
Multistage Ejector
Series ZL112/212 Vacuum
Vacuum pressure
1-stag
e pe
consumption reduced
rform
20% with 3-stage Q1 Q2 Q3
ance
Maximum
Q1 Q2 Q3 suction flow rate Air consumption
diffuser construction 2-stage l/min (ANR) l/min (ANR)
(Versus ø1.3, one-stage model) perform
3-stage
ance
performance ZL112 100 63
250 % suction flow Suction
rate increase flow rate
ZL212 200 126
Series ZL212
Diffusers stacked and integrated
Compact size and large flow rate
(twice the flow rate of the ZL112)
Vacuum Equipment
Ported exhaust
UNIT
RESET RESET
RESET SET
SET SET
ZL112 100 63
229
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 230
Series ZL112/212
How to Order
230
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 231
Ejector Specifications
Standard type
Model ZL112
Nozzle diameter ø1.2 mm
Maximum suction flow rate 100 l/min (ANR)
Air consumption 63 l/min (ANR)
Maximum vacuum pressure –84 kPa
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa
Supply pressure range 0.2 to 0.5 MPa
Standard supply pressure 0.4 MPa
Operating temperature range 5 to 50°C
With valve
Supply/Release Valve Specifications
Vacuum Equipment
Option Specifications
Symbol
Standard type
P V
231
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 232
Series ZL112/212
Option Specifications
With digital vacuum
pressure switch Digital vacuum pressure switch specifications
(ZSE4) Part number ZSE4-00--X105 ZSE4B-00--X105 ZSE4E-00--X105
Display LCD LCD with backlight LED
Pressure setting range –101 to 10 kPa (–760 to 75 mmHg)
Maximum operating pressure 200 kPa
Indicator light OUT1: Green
(lights up when ON) Green
OUT2: Red
Response frequency 200 Hz (5 ms)
Hysteresis mode Variable (3 digits or more) Variable (can be set from 0)
Hysteresis
Window comparator mode Fixed (3 digits)
Fluid Air, Non-corrosive gas
Temperature characteristics ±3% F.S. or less
Repeatability ±1% F.S. or less
Operating voltage 12 to 24VDC (ripple ±10% or less )
Output specifications
-25 (L) 1 output, NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
ZSE4
-26 (L) Analog output (1 to 5 V)
ZSE4B
-67 (L) 1 output, PNP open collector 80 mA or less
-26 (L) Analog output (1 to 5 V)
ZSE4E -27 (L) 2 outputs, NPN open collector 30 V, 80 mA or less
-67 (L) 2 outputs, PNP open collector 80 mA or less
232
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 233
ZL2 12
Ejector Specifications
Model ZL212
Nozzle diameter ø1.2 mm x 2
Maximum suction flow rate 200 l/min (ANR)
With adaptor Air consumption 126 l /min (ANR)
Maximum vacuum pressure –84 kPa
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa
Supply pressure range 0.2 to 0.5 MPa
Standard supply pressure 0.4 MPa
Operating temperature range 5 to 50°C
Vacuum Equipment
Symbol
Ported exhaust Standard type
233
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 234
ZM1-K5LZ-E15L-X142
How to Order
88 ZM 1 K 5 LZ E15 L X142
Switch type
M5 x 0.8 through hole Conforms to the
(P.E.) standard product.
1.5
Electrical entry
600
Conforms to the standard product.
Supply
Power supply voltage
112
P
ZM∗∗1∗—K5LZ-E15L-X142
24 VDC
85.4
30
74
70
H 0.5 MPa
M 0.35 MPa (except 05)
15.5 S 0.45 MPa (13, 15 only)
Vacuum
2-ø4.5
20 30 Body type
Mounting hole
Conforms to the standard product.
3-Rc 1/8
Nozzle diameter
05 0.5 mm (H type only)
07 0.7 mm (except S type)
V
ZM1-K5LZ-E15L-X235
No.1
No.4 SET
L
HYS
H
How to Order
No.2
No.3
4 88 ZM 1 K 5 L Z E15L X235
1 3
2
ø14
Connector pin
number Power supply voltage
24 VDC
44
1.5
With air supply valve/
ø3.4
vacuum release valve
500
(P.E.)
P
M 0.35 MPa (except 05)
ZM∗∗1∗—K5LZ-E15L-X235
85.4
Body type
V Vacuum
26
234
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 235
Connecting multiple pads to a single
ejector is possible. Prevents leakage
from pads that are not used for suction of
workpieces.
How to Order
INO-3769-2431-U INO-3769-1964-C
Pad material N: NBR
S: Silicon rubber Buffer stroke 10: 10 mm
U: Urethane rubber 20: 20 mm
F: Fluoro rubber 30: 30 mm
GN: Conductive NBR 50: 50 mm
GS: Conductive silicon Buffer specification J: Without rotation prevention
GF: Conductive fluoro rubber K: With rotation prevention
Pad configuration U: Flat Pad material N: NBR
Pad diameter 06: ø6 S: Silicon rubber
(for ZP06, 08U) 08: ø8 U: Urethane rubber
F: Fluoro rubber
Vacuum Pad material End pin material GN: Conductive NBR
M6 x 1 NBR GS: Conductive silicon rubber
Gasket Silicon rubber
Width across Fluoro rubber Pad configuration C: Plain with rib
flats 7 Urethane rubber (for ZP20 to 32C)
Fluoro rubber
Pad diameter 20: ø20
20
Conductive NBR
15.5
25: ø25
12
ø1.6 M14 x 1
Model A B Y Width across
øA flats 19
INO-3769-2431-06U 6 7 0.8
øB
INO-3769-2431-08U 8 9 1
5 5
I
INO-3769-2478-U
Pad material N: NBR
Vacuum Equipment
H
S: Silicon rubber
Width across Gasket
U: Urethane rubber flats 12
F: Fluoro rubber
G
Conductive NBR
15.5
12
End pin Conductive silicon Conductive fluoro rubber Dimensions for other strokes
Y
235
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 236
INO-3971-77-4
ø18.5
21.5
39.5
57.1
124.1
25 6.5
ø10 2-ø5.5
Supply
ø16.5
18
52
Exhaust Vacuum
37
ø25
27
13
13
ø12
Rc 3/8
236
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 237
Industrial Filters
Industrial Filters
237
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 238
Industrial Filters
Series FG Coolant
Series FGD, FGE, FGG Series FGA, FGB, FGC Bag Filter Series FGF
FGB type
FGE type
FGG type FGC type
• FGD type: Ideal for low flow filtration • FGA type: High flow vertical element type • Highly effective for filtration of high
• FGE type: Ideal for medium flow rate • FGB type: High flow suspended type temperature and high viscosity fluids
filtration • FGC type: High pressure low flow rate • Ideal for high flow filtration
• FGG type: Ideal for high flow filtration type • Easy handling of filtered impurities
• Connection: Rc 3/8 to Rc 2 • Connection: Flange JIS10K1B to 6B • Operating pressure: 0.5 MPa
• Number of elements: 1 to 28 Flange JIS and ANS1 • Operating temperature: 80°C to 120°C
• Operating temperature: Maximum 80°C 1/2B to 1B (FGC type) • Connection: Rc 2
• Number of elements: 1 to 83 • Number of elements: 1, 3, & 5
• Operating temperature: Maximum 80°C
Application example
Bag filter
238
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 239
Series FG
Filter Elements
Fiber Element Membrane Element Micromesh Element Sintered Stainless Steel Bag Element
Bronze Element
• Nominal filtration • Absolute filtration • Nominal filtration • Nominal filtration • Nominal filtration
accuracy: 0.5 to 100 µm accuracy: 0.2, 0.4 µm accuracy: 5 to 105 µm accuracy: 2 to 120 µm accuracy: 5 to 100 µm
• Low cost, disposable • Long life due to high • High filtration accuracy • With excellent • Low cost, disposable
porosity rate and low with stainless steel mesh mechanical strength,
• Material can be selected pressure loss • Ideal for large amount of
depending on the fluid • Pleated type provides 3 thermal resistance, and impurities
• Ideal for filtration of pure chemical resistance
• Ideal for relatively large water used for rinsing in times larger filtration • Easy to handle since all
amount of impurities the semi conductor field, area than cylinder type • Wide operating impurities are captured
etc. • Easy to wash the temperature range inside the bag element
• Ideal for use as a
prefilter • All elements inspected element for regeneration • High filtration accuracy • Exclusive element for
for quality assurance with sintered fine bag filters
• Material: • Cotton
• 0.2 µm item: Pre-rinsed powder metal
• Viscose rayon with ultra pure water, • Element can be washed
• Glass fiber germ removal efficiency for regeneration
of LRV = 7 or more
239
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 240
Element construction
When compressed
Filter plate
Groove
5 µmm, 20 µmm
Wave washer
When decompressed
Filter plate
Wave washer
Filtering Back-flushing
Cylinder
Automatic back-flushing
System circuit allows the automatic back-flushing when the element is clogged.
Air
B Setting up filters in a line and flushing
A the fluid alternately allow continuous
operation during back-flushing.
Filtering Back-flushing
IN OUT
Fluid
Fluid direction Fluid direction
when filtering when Fluid Fluid
back-flushing
Industrial Filters
Back-flushing Filtering
DRAIN
241
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 242
Series FN1
How to Order
FN1 1 0 1 N 10 S 020
Housing material Pressure gauge
1 Stainless steel SUS304 Nil Without pressure gauge (with plug)
G Note) G46-15-02 (Wetted part: Brass)
Element type Note) Contact SMC for the pressure gauge
specification for stainless steel wetted
0 Cylindrical type parts.
1 Note) Step type
Filtration
Note) Only 5 µm of filtration
is available. 005 5 µm (Cylindrical type, Step type)
020 20 µm (Cylindrical type)
Element length
1 250 mm
2 500 mm
Element material
S Stainless steel SUS304
Seal material
N NBR Port size
V FPM 10 Rc 1
Specifications
Filter
Model FN1111 FN1101 FN1102 FN1112
Element dimension ø65 x 250 l ø65 x 500 l
Fluid Cleaning solvent, Coolant Note1)
Operating pressure Max. 1.0 MPa
Operating fluid temperature Max. 80C
Flow rate Note2) 40 l/min 80 l/min
Bore size Rc 1 (IN, OUT, DRAIN)
Material Case and cover: Stainless steel 304, O-ring: NBR/FPM
Material Stainless steel 304
Element
Operating part
Model CDLQB63-D-F
Auto switch Without auto switch (built-in magnet) Note 1)
Fluid Air
Operating pressure 0.2 to 1.0 MPa Note 2)
Ambient and fluid temperature 10 to 70C (with no freezing) Note 3)
Unlocking pressure 0.2 MPa or more
Lock
242
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 243
Option
Reservoir
Model FNR100N-10 FNR100V-10 FNR101N-10 FNR101V-10
Tank capacity 1.1 l 1.8 l
Port size Rc 1
Bowl & Cover Stainless steel 304
Material
O-ring NBR FPM NBR FPM
Weight 1.5 kg 1.9 kg
Applicable filter FN11
1
(Element 250 mm) FN11
2
(Element 500 mm)
243
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 244
Series FN1
Element length 250 mm: FN111-10-S Element length 500 mm: FN112-10-S
.1 .1
.05 .05
)
µm
(5
05
Pressure loss (MPa)
)
0-
µm
)
-1
µm
(5
1
05
(2
S0
11
20
.01 .01
0-
FN
S0
-1
)
0-
µm
12
-1
(2
1
11
20
FN
S0
11
0 -
FN
.005 .005 -1
21
1 1
FN
.001 .001
10 30 50 70 100 10 30 50 70 100
Q (l/min) Q (l/min)
100 100
) m)
µm 0µ
(5 (2
0
5
02
00
-SS-
-S
-10
80
10
80
N-
N
01
01
11
11
FN
FN
Filtration efficiency (%)
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
5 10 20 50 75 20 25 35 65 90
Particle diameter (µm) Particle diameter (µm)
244
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 245
0.2
Pressure loss (MPa)
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.001
0 2 4 0 2 4 0 2 4 0 2 4 0 2 4
4.5 4.5 4.6 4.4 4.5
100% 100% 102% 98% 100%
Measurement Circuit
Dust
feeder
Tank
Differential
pressure gauge
Industrial Filters
Flow
meter
Pressure
gauge
Measuring T
filter
Pump
Series FN1
Piping Example
Series FN1 Low Maintenance Filter cannot be used alone.
Please follow the component configuration and operation steps illustrated below.
Cylinder for element decompression
and compression
q
(ø6)
y w
B
A
e r
IN OUT
Series FN1
Low Maintenance Filter
Liquid (Coolant)
(Connections are all 1.)
Series FNR Reservoir
Air
Tank to store liquid for back flushing
(liquid coolant)
t
Dust
DRAIN
Tank for dust
removal filter
Example of connection device
No. Description Device No. Description Device
q Cylinder driving valve 5-port solenoid valve (Series SY) r OUT side valve Coolant valve (Series VNC)
w Air supply valve Process valve (Series VNB) t Drain valve Coolant valve (Ball type)
e IN side valve Coolant valve (Ball type) y Speed controller Speed controller (Series AS)
Series inside ( ) indicate SMC products. Contact SMC regarding the valves e to t.
Caution
1. Cylinder for element decompression and com- 4. Air pressure
pression Devise the by-pass circuit on the upstream side of IN side
Do not overthrottle the speed controller when adjusting the valve to prevent the line pressure during back flushing from
cylinder retraction speed (element decompression). rising and to protect the pump.
If the element is decompressed too slowly, the back flush-
ing may become ineffective. 5. Maintenance
The filter should be back flushed until the differential pres-
2. Reservoir installation sure reaches 0.1 MPa to avoid a drop in the flow rate due to
Installation of a reservoir (optional) is recommended to store the element clogging and to maintain back flushing effi-
fluid for back flushing. If a reservoir is not going to be ciency.
installed, make sure to allow piping capacity equivalent to a Time it takes to clog the element varies depending on the
size of reservoir between the low maintenance filter and air dust condition. Monitor the clogging condition of the element
supply valve. using a detection switch for differential pressure.
The detection switch for differential pressure is sold sepa-
3. Air pressure rately. Contact SMC for more information.
Set the pressure of the air supply valve to 0.25 to 0.3 MPa. Since the element of this low maintenance filter provides
Increasing the pressure will not improve the back flushing rough filtration efficiency (with conventional notch wire level),
effect. it can be used as a pre-filter to extend the life of the check
Use the same set pressure for the supply pressure of the filter depending on the fluid condition in use.
lock cylinder. Exceeding this pressure range may increase Installing these low maintenance filters side by side to use
the load applied to the filtering plate when the element is them alternately enables continuous operation during back
compressed, causing malfunction. flushing. Use an element with 500 mm in length for highly
contaminated fluid. A sufficient flow rate can be ensured by
installing two to three low maintenance filters in a row in
case of the insufficient flow capacity.
Industrial Filters
247
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 248
Series FN1
Construction
r
i
q o
t
IN OUT IN OUT
DRAIN DRAIN
FN11
2
For element length ø65 x 500 mm
248
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 249
Dimensions
∗ Rc 1/4
0°
315° 45°
IN OUT
B.C
.D2
30
225° 135°
ø42
4-ø11
G46-15-02
Note) Use the Pc 1/4 port marked with an asterisk when designing Pressure gauge port size Rc 1/4
an air release circuit.
Rc 1/4 108
Head end cylinder port
D (Stroke)
Rod end cylinder port
(Manual lock release)
Rc 1/8
Unlocking port
IN OUT
(125) C
(ø102)
B
A
Industrial Filters
Rc 1
DRAIN
195
(ø270)
Dimensions (mm)
Model Bore size (Nominal size B) A B C D
FN111 610 (730) (844) 20
Rc 1
FN112 860 (1000) (1134) 40
249
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 250
Series FN1
Options
Reservoir Dust removal filter
108
32 0°
315°
45°
70
0
270° D.22
P.C.
70 90°
(80)
50
135°
4-ø11 180°
225°
(266)
(60) AIR VENT
q G1/4
q
(43)
IN OUT
e
e
ø150
r
B
327
(519)
ø188
A
w
w
ø84
OUT
2-R1
r
120
IN
53
DRAIN
G1/4
Replacement parts
No. Description Material Note
NBR JIS B 2401-1A-P85
4 O-ring
FPM JIS B 2401-4D-P85
250
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 251
Other (CD-ROM)
Application Page
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00 Actuator 252
Energy Saving Program Ver. 2 Air blow, Air tool, Coolant 257
SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6 Actuator 259
(CD-ROM)
Other
251
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 252
Pneumatic equipment with minimum energy consumption is automatically selected.
Automatic selection of optimum product groups that meet your energy-saving requirements
Highly accurate calculation with dynamic characteristics simulation (within ±10%)
Calculation of shock absorbing capacity and estimation of dew condensation probability
Compliant with ISO6358 flow characteristics standard
Multiple users can simultaneously access to this program from the website.
252
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 253
Model Selection Software Ver. 3.00 can handle branch and interflow
circuits (single valve and multiple cylinders) or a manifold circuit
(multiple valves and cylinders).
253
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 254
254
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 255
Simplified Operation
Limitation of equipment Setting the specific parameters
Equipment to be selected is limited. The unit of measurements and the input values that are
most frequently used should be entered.
Help Function
Contains definition of terminologies, explanations of functions, calculation methods, updated ver-
sion information, detailed explanations of registered products, etc. Press F1 key to display.
Prior to use
Configulation of the functions
Updates Dynamic characteristics analysis method
Flow characteristics conform to ISO.
Database of registered equipment
Condensation
Supplement Load
Glossary Load ratio
Air consumption and required air volume
Shock absorber selection
Specific moment calculation
(CD-ROM)
Other
255
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 256
Air Blow
Air Tool
Various calculations required for the
pneumatic energy saving improvement are possible.
This program contributes to the energy savings of a This energy saving program was developed
to provide a better understanding about the
pneumatic system from the design stage to analysis of the different states of air (e.g. consumption, flow,
pressure, and humidity) between the air
present state and simulation of possible improvements. supply and related equipment within a facility.
Air Supply
Compressed air cost
Energy conversion
Unit conversion
Terminal Dryer
Equipment Selection of air dryer
Selection of aftercooler
Air consumption
Selection of air filter
Selection of an air-blow system and
Conversion of humidity
calculation of its characteristics
and dew points
Flow rate and conductance
Drain amount calculation
Composition of conductance
State of air change
Conductance search
Regulators Piping
and Tanks Pressure drop of main piping
Air pipeline network
Selection of regulator
Air leakage cost
Selection of booster
Coolant pipelines
Selection of air tank
Charge and discharge
to/from tank
Accumulation function
The air consumption of each device can be calculated. The total
volume of air consumption by device and line can be determined, as
well as the total cost.
Complicated calculations no Complicated calculations such as the volume of air consumption and pressure drop are no longer required.
longer need to be manually Calculation results can be acquired by simply inputting user conditions.
Now, the program can calculate and simulate the followings which can not be conducted manually:
performed. • Pressure decrease and flow rate calculation in a pneumatic pressure line net (divert piping and loop piping).
The program offers quick • Pressure change simulation of replenishment and discharge of a tank.
calculation results! 257
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 258
Improvement of energy Cost calculations for air and energy conversions, The program can be used Our flow rate calculation formula
savings consciousness CO2 discharge are possible, as a result by globally because it uses the JIS B conforms to ISO 6358 and its
studying these values, energy savings 8390 (ISO standard) flow rate accuracy is an improvement over
consciousness can be improved and promoted. the existing formula.
measuring method.
258
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 259
The following type of specifications are programmed in “SMC Pneumatics CAD System Ver. 2.6”.
1) Specifications for outputting data compatible with the complete part numbers among the main product line. (Pneumatic CAD System)
Data output compatible with the complete part numbers from the main product line. (Pneumatic CAD System)
OS Windows98/Me/XP/2000/NT4(SP6)
CPU Pentium 150 or higher is recommended.
Display 800 x 600 pixels or more
Registered products 186 series
Determination of part numbers The complete part number will be created automatically. (Directly input part no. or search by part no., name, or series.)
Data can be outputted. Drawing data output according to the complete part numbers in a parametric way.
Main Confirmation of selected drawings (dimensional display, CAD measurement as desired), Selection of
functions Able to confirm CAD drawings. background screen color (White/Black)
2) Specifications for outputting data from all products. (Electronic Catalog II Search System)
Data output compatible with all the part numbers of the products. (Electronic Catalog II Search System)
OS Windows98/Me/XP/2000/NT4 (SP6)
CPU Pentium 150 or higher is recommended.
Display 800 x 600 pixels or more
Registered products 652 series
Search by product classiication Can confirm the file contents by searching the registered file from the product's classification.
(CD-ROM)
Main
2) Drawing data based on the complete part numbers.
functions
1) Data output in a DXF format
Output data format
2) Data output in a DOS (DMNDOS) format
Note) Please consult with us for additional data not listed above because it is available in another CD-ROM.
259
Table of Contents
Energy Saving Proposals & Energy Saving Equipment List Front matter 1, 2
Proposal 2 Non-operation 7
Table of Contents 1
Table of Contents
Energy Saving Proposals & Energy Saving Equipment List Front matter 1, 2
Proposal 2 Non-operation 7
Table of Contents 1
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 260
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent a hazardous situation and/or
equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard by a
label of "Caution", "Warning" or "Danger". To ensure safety, be sure to observe
ISO 4414 Note 1), JIS B 8370 Note 2) and other safety practices.
Danger : In extreme conditions, there is a possible result of serious injury or loss of life.
Warning
1. The compatibility of the pneumatic equipment is the responsibility of the
person who designs the pneumatic system or decides its specifications.
Since the products specified here are used in various operating conditions, their compatibility for the specific
pneumatic system must be based on specifications or post analysis and/or tests to meet the specific
requirements. The expected performance and safety assurance are the responsibility of the person who has
determined the compatibility of the system. This person should continuously review the suitability of all items
specified, referring to the latest catalog information with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of
equipment failure when configuring a system.
2. Only trained personnel should operate pneumatically operated machinery and
equipment.
Compressed air can be dangerous if handled incorrectly. Assembly, handling or repair of pneumatic systems
should be performed by trained and experienced operators.
3. Do not service machinery/equipment or attempt to remove components until
safety is confirmed.
1. Inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed once measures to prevent
falling or runaway of the driver objects have been confirmed.
2. When equipment is removed, confirm that safety process as mentioned above. Turn off the supply pressure for
this equipment and exhaust all residual compressed air in the system.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent quick extension of a cylinder piston rod, etc.
4. Contact SMC if the product will be used in any of the following conditions:
1. Conditions and environments beyond the given specifications, or if product is used outdoors.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railway, air navigation, vehicles, medical
equipment, food and beverages, recreation equipment, emergency stop circuits, clutch and brake circuits in
press applications, or safety equipment.
3. An application which has the possibility of having negative effects on people, property, or animals, requiring
special safety analysis.
4. If the products are used in an interlock circuit, prepare a double interlock style circuit with a mechanical
protection function for the prevention of a breakdown. And, examine the devices periodically if they function
normally or not.
260
ECOPS.qxd 05.9.5 11:29 AM Page 261
CAT.E02-21 B